Brain Teasers

Brain Teaser No : 00001
At what time immediately prior to Six O'clock the hands of the clock are exactly opposite to each
other.
Give the exact time in hours, minutes and seconds.
Answer
4 hrs. 54 min. 32.74 seconds
It is obvious that between 5 O'clock and 6 O'clock the hands will not be exactly opposite to each
other. It is also obvious that
the hands will be opposite to each other just before 5 O'clock. Now to find exact time:
The hour hand moves 1 degree for every 12 degrees that the minute hand moves. Let the hour
hand be X degree away from 5
O'clock. Therefore the minute hand is 12X degree away from 12 O'clock.
Therefore solving for X
Angle between minute hand and 12 O'clock + Angle between 12 O'clock and 4 O'clock + Angle
between 4 O'clock and hour
hand = 180
12X + 120 + (30-X) = 180
11X = 30
Hence X = 30/11 degrees
(hour hand is X degree away from 5 O'clock)
Now each degree the hour hand moves is 2 minutes.
Therefore minutes are
= 2 * 30/11
= 60/11
= 5.45 (means 5 minutes 27.16 seconds)
Therefore the exact time at which the hands are opposite to each other is
= 4 hrs. 54 min. 32.74 seconds

Ali Baba had four sons, to whom he bequeathed his 39 camels, with the proviso that the legacy be
divided in the following way :
The oldest son was to receive one half the property, the next a quarter, the third an eighth and the
youngest one tenth. The four
brothers were at a loss as how to divide the inheritance among themselves without cutting up a
camel, until a stranger appeared
upon the scene.
Dismounting from his camel, he asked if he might help, for he knew just what to do. The brothers
gratefully accepted his offer.
Adding his own camel to Ali Baba's 39, he divided the 40 as per the will. The oldest son received
20, the next 10, the third 5 and
the youngest 4. One camel remained : this was his, which he mounted and rode away.
Scratching their heads in amazement, they started calculating. The oldest thought : is not 20 greater
than the half of 39? Someone
must have received less than his proper share ! But each brother discovered that he had received
more than his due. How is it
possible?
Answer
They took their percentages from 40 and not from 39, so they got more than their share.
The oldest son got 1/2 of 40 = 20 which is 0.5 more
The second son got 1/4 of 40 = 10 which is 0.25 more
The third son got 1/8 of 40 = 5 which is 0.125 more
The youngest son got 1/10 of 40 = 4 which is 0.1 more
And the stranger got 1/40 of 40 = 1 which is 0.025 more (As he is not supposed to get anything)
All these fractions add to = 0.5 + 0.25 + 0.125 + 0.1 + 0.025 = 1 which stranger took away.

In a hotel, rooms are numbered from 101 to 550. A room is chosen at random. What is the
probability that room number starts with
1, 2 or 3 and ends with 4, 5 or 6?
Answer
There are total 450 rooms.
Out of which 299 room number starts with either 1, 2 or 3. (as room number 100 is not there)
Now out of those 299 rooms only
90 room numbers end with 4, 5 or 6
So the probability is 90/450 i.e. 1/5 or 0.20

A man went into a fast food restaurant and ate a meal costing Rs. 105, giving the accountant a Rs.
500 note. He kept the change,
came back a few minutes later and had some food packed for his girl friend. He gave the
accountant a Rs. 100 note and received
Rs. 20 in change. Later the bank told the accountant that both the Rs. 500 and the Rs. 100 notes
were counterfeit.
How much money did the restaurant lose? Ignore the profit of the food restaurant.
Answer
He lost Rs.600
First time restaurant has given food worth Rs.105 and Rs. 395 change. Similarly second time, food
worth Rs.80 and Rs.20
change. Here, we are not considering food restaurant profits.
You are working in a store that stocks bangles. Three boxes of bangles have been incorrectly
labeled. The labels say Red Bangles,
Green Bangles and Red & Green Bangles.
How can you re-label the boxes correctly, by taking only one bangle from one box?
Answer
Keep in mind that boxes are incorrectly labeled.
Take out one bangle from the box labeled "Red & Green Bangles". There are 2 possibilities:
If that bangle is Red, it means that box contains Red Bangles. The box labeled as "Green Bangles"
contains Red & Green
Bangles. And box labeled "Red Bangles" contains Green bangles.
.
RED GREEN BOX --- Red Bangles
RED BOX --- Green Bangles
GREEN BOX --- Red & Green Bangles
If that bangle is Green, it means that box contains Green
Bangles. The box labeled as "Green Bangles" contains Red
Bangles. And box labeled "Red Bangles" contains Red &
Green Bangles.
RED GREEN BOX --- Green Bangles
RED BOX --- Red & Green Bangles
GREEN BOX --- Red Bangles

On one side of a card is written :
"THE SENTENCE ON THE OTHERSIDE OF THIS CARD IS TRUE."
On turning the card over you find:
"THE SENTENCE ON THE OTHERSIDE OF THIS CARD IS FALSE."
Which sentence is true?
Answer
It's a Paradox. Both the sentences are contradictory to each other. If you say that the first sentence
is true, then the second will
contradict it and vice versa.

3 blocks are chosen randomly on a chessboard. What is the probability that they are in the same
diagonal?
Answer
There are total of 64 blocks on a chessboard. So 3 blocks can be chosen out of 64 in 64C3 ways.
So the sample space is = 41664
There are 2 diagonal on chessboard each one having 8 blocks. Consider one of them.
3 blocks out of 8 blocks in diagonal can be chosen in 8C3 ways.
But there are 2 such diagonals, hence favourables = 2 * 8C3 = 2 * 56 = 112
The require probability is
= 112 / 41664
= 1 / 372
= 0.002688

In a contest of intelligence, three problems A, B and C were posed.
Among the contestants there were 25 who solved at least one problem each.
Of all the contestants who did not solve problem A, the number who solved B was twice the
number who solved C.
The number of participants who solved only problem A was one more than the number who
solved problem A and at least
one other problem.
Of all students who solved just one problem, half did not solve problem A.
How many students solved only problem B?
.
Answer
6 students solved only problem B
X => Students who solved only problem A
Y => Students who solved only problem B
Z => Students who solved only problem C
P => Students who solved both problem B and problem C
From 4 :
Students who solved only problem A = Students who solved only problem B + Students who
solved only problem C
X=Y+Z
From 3 :
Students who solved problem A and at least one other = X - 1
From 2 :
(Y + P) = 2 * (Z + P)
Y+P=2*Z+2*P
Z = (Y - P) / 2
From 1 and Figure:
X + X - 1 + Y + Z + P = 25
2*X + Y + Z + P = 26
2*(Y + Z) + Y + Z + P = 26 (from 4)
3*Y + 3*Z + P = 26
3*Y + 3* (Y - P) / 2 + P = 26 (from 2)
6*Y + 3*Y - 3*P + 2*P = 52
9*Y - P = 52
Y = (52 + P) / 9
Now, it is obvious that all values are integer. Hence, P must be 2 and Y must be 6.
So 6 students solved only problem B.

When Alexander the Great attacked the forces of Porus, an Indian soldier was captured by the
Greeks. He had displayed such
bravery in battle, however, that the enemy offered to let him choose how he wanted to be killed.
They told him, "If you tell a lie, you
will put to the sword, and if you tell the truth you will be hanged."
The soldier could make only one statement. He made that statement and went free. What did he
say?
Answer
The soldier said, "You will put me to the sword."
The soldier has to say a Paradox to save himself. If his statement is true, he will be hanged, which
is not the sword and hence
false. If his statement is false, he will be put to the sword, which will make it true. A Paradox !!!
.

Five horses ran in the race.
There were no ties.
Sikandar did not come first.
Star was neither first nor last.
Mughal Glory came in one place after Sikandar.
Zozo was not second.
Rangila was two place below Zozo.
In what order did the horses finish?
Answer
It's simple.
Let's find the possible places horses can finish. Possibilities are:
Sikandar - 2,3,4 (not 5th as Mughal Glory came one place after him)
Star - 2,3,4
Mughal Glory - 3,4,5
Zozo - 1,3 (not 4th & 5th as Rangila is two place after him)
Rangila - 3,5
So the result is:
1 Zozo
2 Star
3 Rangila
4 Sikandar
5 Mughal Glory

In the town called Alibaug, the following facts are true:
No two inhabitants have exactly the same number of hairs.
No inhabitants has exactly 2025 hairs.
There are more inhabitants than there are hairs on the head of any one inhabitants.
What is the largest possible number of the inhabitants of Alibaug?
Answer
2025
It is given that no inhabitants have exactly 2025 hairs. Hence there are 2025 inhabitants with 0 to
2024 hairs in the head.
Suppose there are more than 2025 inhabitants. But these will violate the condition that "There are
more inhabitants than there
are hairs on the head of any one inhabitants." As for any number more than 2025, there will be
same number of inhabitants as
the maximum number of hairs on the head of any inhabitant.

At what time after 4.00 p.m. is the minutes hand of a clock exactly aligned with the hour hand?
Answer
4:21:49.5
.
Assume that X minutes after 4.00 PM minute hand exactly aligns with and hour hand.
For every minute, minute hand travels 6 degrees.
Hence, for X minutes it will travel 6 * X degrees.
For every minute, hour hand travels 1/2 degrees.
Hence, for X minutes it will travel X/2 degrees.
At 4.00 PM, the angle between minute hand and hour hand is 120 degrees. Also, after X minutes,
minute hand and hour hand
are exactly aligned. So the angle with respect to 12 i.e. Vertical Plane will be same. Therefore,
6 * X = 120 + X/2
12 * X = 240 + X
11 * X = 240
X = 21.8182
X = 21 minutes 49.5 seconds
Hence, at 4:21:49.5 minute hand is exactly aligned with the hour hand.

A card contains following three sentences:
a. THIS SENTENCE CONTAINS FIVE WORDS.
b. THIS SENTENCE CONTAINS TWO VERBS.
c. EXACTLY ONE SENTENCE ON THIS CARD IS TRUE.
Is sentence C true or false?
Answer
It's a paradox.
You can·t say it true or false, as your answer will contradict itself.
A barber in a certain small town shaves all the men who do not shave themselves, but never shaves
any who do shave
themselves.
Does the barber shave himself? Note that the barber is a man.
Answer
It's a paradox.
You can't say it true or false, as your answer will contradict itself.
A rich man died. In his will, he has divided his gold coins among his 5 sons, 5 daughters and a
manager.
According to his will: First give one coin to manager. 1/5th of the remaining to the elder son. Now
give one coin to the manager and
1/5th of the remaining to second son and so on..... After giving coins to 5th son, divided the
remaining coins among five daughters
equally.
All should get full coins. Find the minimum number of coins he has?
.
Answer
We tried to find out some simple mathematical method and finally we wrote small C program to
find out the answer. The
answer is 3121 coins.
Here is the breakup:
First son = 624 coins
Second son = 499 coins
Third son = 399 coins
Forth son = 319 coins
Fifth son = 255 coins
Daughters = 204 each
Manager = 5 coins
There were N stations on a railroad. After adding X stations 46 additional tickets have to be
printed.
Find N and X.
Answer
Let before adding X stations, total number of tickets
t = N(N-1)
After adding X stations total number of tickets are
t + 46 = (N+X)(N+X-1)
Subtracting 1st from 2nd
46 = (N+X)(N+X-1) - N(N-1)
46 = N2 + NX - N + NX + X2 - X - N2 + N
46 = 2NX + X2 - X
46 = (2N - 1)X + X2
X2 + (2N - 1)X - 46 = 0
Now there are only two possible factors of 46. They are (46,1) and (23,2)
Case I: (46,1)
2N - 1 = 45
2N = 46
N = 23
And X = 1
Case II: (23,2)
2N - 1 = 21
2N = 22
N = 11
And X = 2
Hence, there are 2 possible answers.
There is a grid of 20 squares by 10 squares. How many different rectangles are possible?
Note that square is a rectangle.
Answer
.
11550
The Generic solution to this is:
Total number of rectangles = (Summation of row numbers) * (Summation of column numbers)
Here there are 20 rows and 10 columns or vice versa. Hence, total possible rectangles
= ( 20 + 19 + 18 + 17 + 16 + .... + 3 + 2 + 1 ) * ( 10 + 9 +8 + 7 + .... + 3 + 2 + 1)
= ( 210 ) * (55)
= 11550
Hence, total 11,550 different rectangles are possible.
If you don't believe it, try formula on some smaller grids like 4x2, 3x2, 3x3 etc...
A person wanted to withdraw X rupees and Y paise from the bank. But cashier made a mistake
and gave him Y rupees and X
paise. Neither the person nor the cashier noticed that.
After spending 20 paise, the person counts the money. And to his surprise, he has double the
amount he wanted to withdraw.
Find X and Y. (1 Rupee = 100 Paise)
Answer
As given, the person wanted to withdraw 100X + Y paise.
But he got 100Y + X paise.
After spending 20 paise, he has double the amount he wanted to withdraw. Hence, the equation is
2 * (100X + Y) = 100Y + X - 20
200X + 2Y = 100Y +X - 20
199X - 98Y = -20
98Y - 199X = 20
Now, we got one equation; but there are 2 variables. We have to apply little bit of logic over here.
We know that if we
interchange X & Y, amount gets double. So Y should be twice of X or one more than twice of X
i.e. Y = 2X or Y = 2X+1
Case I : Y=2X
Solving two equations simultaneously
98Y - 199X = 20
Y - 2X = 0
We get X = - 20/3 & Y = - 40/2
Case II : Y=2X+1
Solving two equations simultaneously
98Y - 199X = 20
Y - 2X = 1
We get X = 26 & Y = 53
Now, its obvious that he wanted to withdraw Rs. 26.53
What is the remainder left after dividing 1! + 2! + 3! + « + 100! By 7?
Think carefully !!!
.
Answer
A tricky one.
7! onwards all terms are divisible by 7 as 7 is one of the factor. So there is no remainder left for
those terms i.e. remainder left
after dividing 7! + 8! + 9! + ... + 100! is 0.
The only part to be consider is
= 1! + 2! + 3! + 4! + 5! + 6!
= 1 + 2 + 6 + 24 + 120 + 720
= 873
The remainder left after dividing 873 by 7 is 5
Hence, the remainder is 5.
Find the last digit of summation of the series:
199 + 299 + 399 + 499 + ««« + 9899 + 9999
Answer
The last digit of the series is 0.
We group the sum as follow:
(199 + 1199 + ... + 9199) + (299 + 2299 + ... 9299) + ...... + (999 + 1999 + ... + 9999) + (1099 +
2099 + 3099 + ... 9099)
All the terms in a single group have the same last digit (i.e. last digits of 199 + 1199 + ... + 9199 are
same, is 1, & similarly for the
other groups).
Also, there are 10 terms in each group except for the last one. Therefore the last digit of the sum
of terms in first 9 groups is 0.
(as whatever be the last digit, we have to multiply it by 10) And the last digit of the sum of the terms
in the group 10 is obviously
0.
Hence, the last digit of the series is 0.
Find the smallest number such that if its rightmost digit is placed at its left end, the new number so
formed is precisely 50% larger
than the original number.
Answer
The answer is 285714.
If its rightmost digit is placed at its left end, then new number is 428571 which is 50% larger than
the original number 285714.
The simplest way is to write a small program. And the other way is trial and error !!!
There are 10 boxes containing 10 balls each. 9 boxes contain 10 balls of 10 kg each and one box
contains 10 balls of 9 kg each.
Tool is available for proper weighing. How can you find out the box containing 9 kg balls?
You are allowed to weigh only once. You can remove balls from the boxes. All balls are of same
size and color.
.
Answer
1. Mark the boxes with numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, ... upto 10
2. Take 1 ball from box 1, take 2 balls from box 2, take 3 balls from box 3, take 4 balls from box 4
and so on
3. Put all of them on the scale at once and take the measurement.
4. Now, subtract the measurement from 550 ( 1*10 + 2*10 + 3*10 + 4*10 + 5*10 + 6*10 + 7*10 +
8*10 + 9*10 + 10*10)
5. The result will give you the box number which has a ball of 9 Kg
A fly is flying between two trains, each travelling towards each other on the same track at 60 km/h.
The fly reaches one engine,
reverses itself immediately, and flies back to the other engine, repeating the process each time.
The fly is flying at 90 km/h. If the fly flies 180 km before the trains meet, how far apart were the
trains initially?
Answer
Initially, the trains were 240 km apart.
The fly is flying at the speed of 90 km/h and covers 180 km. Hence, the fly flies for 2 hours after
trains started.
It's obvious that trains met 2 hours after they started travelling towards each other. Also, trains were
travelling at the speed of
60 km/h. So, each train traveled 120 km before they met.
Hence, the trains were 240 km apart initially.
A certain street has 1000 buildings. A sign-maker is contracted to number the houses from 1 to
1000. How many zeroes will he
need?
Answer
The sign-maker will need 192 zeroes.
Divide 1000 building numbers into groups of 100 each as follow:
(1..100), (101..200), (201..300), ....... (901..1000)
For the first group, sign-maker will need 11 zeroes.
For group numbers 2 to 9, he will require 20 zeroes each.
And for group number 10, he will require 21 zeroes.
The total numbers of zeroes required are
= 11 + 8*20 + 21
= 11 + 160 + 21
= 192
Find sum of digits of D.
Let
A= 19991999
B = sum of digits of A
C = sum of digits of B
D = sum of digits of C
.
(HINT : A = B = C = D (mod 9))
Answer
The sum of the digits od D is 1.
Let E = sum of digits of D.
It follows from the hint that A = E (mod 9)
Consider,
A = 19991999
< 20002000
= 22000 * 10002000
= 1024200 * 106000
< 10800 * 106000
= 106800
i.e. A < 106800
i.e. B < 6800 * 9 = 61200
i.e. C < 5 * 9 = 45
i.e. D < 2 * 9 = 18
i.e. E <= 9
i.e. E is a single digit number.
Also,
1999 = 1 (mod 9)
so 19991999 = 1 (mod 9)
Therefore we conclude that E=1.
Find the smallest number N which has the following properties:
1. its decimal representation has 6 as the last digit.
2. If the last digit 6 is erased and placed in front of the remaining digits, the resulting number is
four times as great as the
original number N.
Answer
The smallest such number is 153846.
Assume that the number N is
N = BnBn-1Bn-2 ... B3B26
as its given that 6 is the last digit.
.
Now after erasing 6 and putting it in front of the remaining digits, we get
Nnew = 6BnBn-1Bn-2 ... B3B2
Also given that Nnew is 4 times the N. Also note that the last digit Nnew is second last digit of N
and so on. The required result is
BnBn-1Bn-2 ... B3B26
X4
--------------------
6BnBn-1Bn-2 ... B3B2
So start multiplying and put nth digit of Nnew to (n + 1)th digit of N and you will get result as
153846
X4
---------------
615384
Hence, the number is 153846
There are 9 coins. Out of which one is odd one i.e weight is less or more. How many iterations of
weighing are required to find odd
coin?
Answer
It is always possible to find odd coin in 3 weighings and to tell whether the odd coin is heavier or
lighter.
1. Take 8 coins and weigh 4 against 4.
o If both are not equal, goto step 2
o If both are equal, goto step 3
2. One of these 8 coins is the odd one. Name the coins on heavier side of the scale as H1, H2, H3
and H4. Similarly,
name the coins on the lighter side of the scale as L1, L2, L3 and L4. Either one of H's is heavier or
one of L's is lighter.
Weigh (H1, H2, L1) against (H3, H4, X) where X is one coin remaining in intial weighing.
o If both are equal, one of L2, L3, L4 is lighter. Weigh L2 against L3.
If both are equal, L4 is the odd coin and is lighter.
If L2 is light, L2 is the odd coin and is lighter.
If L3 is light, L3 is the odd coin and is lighter.
o If (H1, H2, L1) is heavier side on the scale, either H1 or H2 is heavier. Weight H1 against H2
If both are equal, there is some error.
If H1 is heavy, H1 is the odd coin and is heavier.
.
o If (H3, H4, X) is heavier side on the scale, either H3 or H4 is heavier or L1 is lighter. Weight
H3 against H4
If both are equal, L1 is the odd coin and is lighter.
3. The remaining coin X is the odd one. Weigh X against the anyone coin used in initial weighing.
o If both are equal, there is some error.
o If X is heavy, X is the odd coin and is heavier.
o If X is light, X is the odd coin and is lighter.
My friend collects antique stamps. She purchased two, but found that she needed to raise money
urgently. So she sold them for
Rs. 8000 each. On one she made 20% and on the other she lost 20%.
How much did she gain or lose in the entire transaction?
Answer
She lost Rs 666.67
Consider the first stamp. She mades 20% on it after selling it for Rs 8000.
So the original price of first stamp is
= (8000 * 100) / 80
= Rs 6666.67
Similarly, consider second stamp. She lost 20% on it after selling it for Rs 8000
So the original price of second stamp is
= (8000 * 100) / 80
= Rs 10000
Total buying price of two stamps
= Rs 6666.67 + Rs 10000
= Rs 16666.67
Total selling price of two stamps
= Rs 8000 + Rs 8000
= Rs 16000
Hence, she lost Rs 666.67
In a sports contest there were m medals awarded on n successive days (n > 1).
1. On the first day 1 medal and 1/7 of the remaining m - 1 medals were awarded.
2. On the second day 2 medals and 1/7 of the now remaining medals was awarded; and so on.
3. On the nth and last day, the remaining n medals were awarded.
How many days did the contest last, and how many medals were awarded altogether?
Answer
.
Total 36 medals were awarded and the contest was for 6 days.
On day 1: Medals awarded = (1 + 35/7) = 6 : Remaining 30 medals
On day 5: Medals awarded = (5 +7/7) = 6 : Remaining 6 medals
On day 6: Medals awarded 6
I got this answer by writing small program. If anyone know any other simpler method, do submit it.
A number of 9 digits has the following properties:
The number comprising the leftmost two digits is divisible by 2, that comprising the leftmost
three digits is divisible by 3,
the leftmost four by 4, the leftmost five by 5, and so on for the nine digits of the number i.e. the
number formed from the
first n digits is divisible by n, 2<=n<=9.
Each digit in the number is different i.e. no digits are repeated.
The digit 0 does not occur in the number i.e. it is comprised only of the digits 1-9 in some
order.
Find the number.
Answer
The answer is 381654729
One way to solve it is Trial-&-Error. You can make it bit easier as odd positions will always occupy
ODD numbers and even
positions will always occupy EVEN numbers. Further 5th position will contain 5 as 0 does not
occur.
The other way to solve this problem is by writing a computer program that systematically tries all
possibilities.
The population of an island consists of two and only two types of people : the knights, who
invariably tell the truth and the knaves
who always lie.
three of the inhabitants called X, Y and Z were standing together. A newcomer to the island
asked, "Are you a knight or a
knave?" X mumbled his answer rather indistinctly, so the stranger could not quite make out what
he had said. The
stranger than asked Y, "What did X say?" Y replied, "X said that he was a knave." Whereupon Z
said, "Don't believe Y,
he's lying." What are Y and Z?
Suppose that the stranger asked X, instead, "How many knights among you?" Again X replies
indistinctly. So the stranger
asks Y, "What did X say?" Y replies, "X said that there is one knight among us." Then Z says,
"Don't believe Y, he is lying!"
Now what are Y and Z?
There are only two inhabitants, X and Y. X says, "At least one of us is a knave." What are X and
Y?
Suppose X says, "Either I am a knave, or Y is a knight?" What are X and Y?
Consider once more X, Y and Z each of who is either a knight or a knave. X says, "All of us are
knaves." Y says, "Exactly
one of us is a knight." What are X, Y and Z?
Answer
Teaser 1 : A Simple one. The statement made by Y is false - "X said that he was a knave".
.
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4
X Knight Knight Knave Knave
Y Knight Knave Knight Knave
Analyse the above 4 cases. In all the cases statement made by Y is contradicory and therefore false.
Hence, Y is Knave and Z
is Knight.
Teaser 2 : Again the statement made by Y is false - "X said that there is one knight among us".
Analyse these statement with 4
possible cases as above. In all the cases statement made by Y is false. Hence, Y is Knave and Z is
Knight.
Teaser 3 : X is Knight and Y is Knave.
Teaser 4 : Both are Knight.
Teaser 5 : X and Z are Knaves, Y is Knight.
Find next number in the series :
3, 7, 31, 211, ?
Answer
1831
All the numbers in the series are Prime Numbers. So the next number will also be a prime
number.
Two consecutive numbers in the
series
(A and B)
Total Prime numbers bewtween A
and B
(C)
Prime number just before
B
(D)
E = (C +
D)
3 and 7 1 5 6
7 and 31 6 29 35
31 and 211 35 199 234
Number after 7 is the prime number on skipping 6 prime numbers after 7 i.e. 31
Number after 31 is the prime number on skipping 35 prime numbers after 31 i.e. 211
Hence, number after 211 is the prime number on skipping 234 prime numbers after 211 i.e.
1831
The other possible answer is 1891.
Subtract 1 from each number in the given series: 2, 6, 30, 210
First number = 2*1 = 2
Second number = 2*3 = 6
Third number = 6*5 = 30
Fourth number = 30*7 = 210
Fifth number = 210*9 = 1890
Sixth number = 1890*11 = 20790
Thus, the pattern is : multiply previous number by next odd number and add one to the
multiplication. Thus, the series is 3, 7,
31, 211, 1891, 20791, ...
Thanks to N. Anand for this much more simpler answer.
.
Assume for a moment that the earth is a perfectly uniform sphere of radius 6400 km. Suppose a
thread equal to the length of the
circumference of the earth was placed along the equator, and drawn to a tight fit.
Now suppose that the length of the thread is increased by 12 cm, and that it is pulled away
uniformly in all directions.
By how many cm. will the thread be separated from the earth's surface?
Answer
The cicumference of the earth is
= 2 * PI * r
= 2 * PI * 6400 km
= 2 * PI * 6400 * 1000 m
= 2 * PI * 6400 * 1000 * 100 cm
= 1280000000 * PI cm
where r = radius of the earth, PI = 3.141592654
Hence, the length of the thread is = 1280000000 * PI cm
Now length of the thread is increasd by 12 cm. So the new length is = (1280000000 * PI) + 12 cm
This thread will make one concentric circle with the earth which is slightly away from the earth.
The circumfernce of that circle is
nothing but (1280000000 * PI) + 12 cm
Assume that radius of the outer circle is R cm
Therefore,
2 * PI * R = (1280000000 * PI) + 12 cm
Solving above equation, R = 640000001.908 cm
Radius of the earth is r = 640000000 cm
Hence, the thread will be separatedfrom the earth by
= R - r cm
= 640000001.908 - 640000000
= 1.908 cm
A polygon has 1325 diagonals. How many vertices does it have?
Answer
The formula to find number of diagonals (D) given total number of vertices or sides (N) is
N * (N - 3)
D = -----------
2
Using the formula, we get
1325 * 2 = N * (N - 3)
N2 - 3N - 2650 = 0
Solving the quadratic equation, we get N = 53 or -50
It is obvious that answer is 53 as number of vertices can not be negative.
Alternatively, you can derive the formula as triange has 0 diagonals, quadrangel has 2, pentagon
has 5, hexagon has 9 and so
on......
.
Hence the series is 0, 0, 0, 2, 5, 9, 14, ........ (as diagram with 1,2 or 3 vertices will have 0 diagonals).
Using the series one can arrive to the formula given above.
An emergency vehicle travels 10 miles at a speed of 50 miles per hour.
How fast must the vehicle travel on the return trip if the round-trip travel time is to be 20 minutes?
Answer
75 miles per hour
While going to the destination, the vehicle travels 10 mils at the speed of 50 miles per hour. So the
time taken to travel 10 miles
is
= (60 * 10) / 50
= 12 minutes
Now it's given that round-trip travel time is 20 minutes. So the vehicle should complete its return
trip of 10 miles in 8 minutes.
So the speed of the vehicle must
= (60 * 10) / 8
= 75 miles per hour
Professors Ahmad and Joshi are extremely strange persons.
Prof. Ahmad lies on Mondays, Tuesdays and Wednesdays, but tells true on other days of the
week.
Prof. Joshi lies on Thursdays, Fridays and Saturdays, but tells true on other days of the week.
They made the following statements:
Prof. Ahmad : "Yesterday was one of my lying days."
Prof. Joshi : "Yesterday was one of my lying days too."
What day of the week was it?
Both Professors looked very alike and one day they said to a visitor to their department :
First Prof: "I'm Ahmed."
Second Prof: "I'm Joshi."
Who was who? What day of the week was it?
On another occasion, both Professors made the following statements:
First Prof : 1. "I lie on Saturdays."
2. "I lie on Sundays."
Second Prof. : "I will lie tomorrow."
What day of the week was it?
Answer
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun
Prof. Ahmad Lies Lies Lies tells truth tells truth tells truth tells truth
Prof. Joshi tells truth tells truth tells truth Lies Lies Lies tells truth
Teaser 1 :
Assume that Prof. Ahmad is telling truth => today is Thursday
.
Assume that Prof. Ahmad is lying => today is Monday
Similarly, Assume Prof. Joshi is telling truth => today is Sunday
Assume that Prof. Joshi is lying => today is Thrusday.
Hence, today is Thrusday, Prof. Ahmad is telling truth and Prof. Joshi is lying.
Teaser 2 :
Assume that First Prof. is telling truth => Thursday, Friday, Saturday or Sunday
Assume that First Prof. is lying => Thursday, Friday or Saturday
Similarly, Assume Second Prof. is telling truth => Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday or Sunday
Assume that Second Prof. is lying => Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday
The only possibility is Sunday and both are telling truth.
Teaser 3 :
A simple one. First Prof. says - "I lie on Sunday" which is false as both the Prof. tell truth on
sunday. It means the first statement
made by the First Prof. is also false. It means the First Prof. tells truth on Saturday. Hence First
Prof. is Prof. Ahmad and he is
lying. It means that today is either Monday, Tuesday or Wednesday.
It is clear that Second Prof. is Prof. Joshi.
Assume that he is telling truth => today is Wednesday
Assume that he is lying => today is Saturday.
Hence, today is Wednesday !!!
A class of 100 students. 24 of them are girls and 32 are not. Which base am I using?
Answer
Let the base be X.
Therefore
(X*X + X*0 + 0) = (2*X +4) + (3*X + 2)
X*X = 5*X + 6
X*X - 5*X -6 = 0
(X-6)(X+1) = 0
Therefore base is 6
What is the area of the triangle ABC with A(e,p) B(2e,3p) and C(3e,5p)?
where p = PI (3.141592654)
Answer
A tricky ONE.
Given 3 points are colinear. Hence, it is a straight line.
Hence area of triangle is 0.
The ratio of Boys to Girls is 6:4. 60% of the boys and 40% of the girls take lunch in the canteen.
What % of class takes lunch in
canteen?
.
Answer
Assume there are 6X boys and 4X Girls
Total Students taking lunch in canteen
= (6X)(60/100) + (4X)(40/100)
= 36(X/10) + 16(X/10)
= 52(X/10)
Total students are = 6X + 4X = 10X
% of class taking lunch in canteen
= ((52X/10) * 100 ) / 10X
= 52 %
1/3 rd of the contents of a container evaporated on the 1st day. 3/4th of the remaining contents of
the container evaporated on the
second day.
What part of the contents of the container is left at the end of the second day?
Answer
1/6th of the contents of the container is remaining.
Assume that contents of the container is X
On the first day 1/3rd is evaporated.
(1 - 1/3) of X is remaining i.e. (2/3)X
On the Second day 3/4th is evaporated. Hence,
(1- 3/4) of (2/3)X is remaining
i.e. (1/4)(2/3)X = (1/6) X
Hence 1/6th of the contents of the container is remaining.
The average scores of the class for exam are as follow:
Average score of the boys = 90
Average score of the girls = 81
Average score of the class = 84
Find whether Class contains more Boys or Girls?
Answer
Assume that there are B boys and G girls in the Class.
Hence from the given data :
90*B + 81*G = 84*(B+G)
90B + 81G = 84B + 84G
6B = 3G
.
2B = G
Hence number of Girls in the Class are twice the number of Boys.
Two identical pack of cards A and B are shuffled throughly. One card is picked from A and
shuffled with B. The top card from pack
A is turned up. If this is the Queen of Hearts, what are the chances that the top card in B will be
the King of Hearts?
Answer
52 / 2703
There are two cases to be considered.
CASE 1 : King of Hearts is drawn from Pack A and shuffled with Pack B
Probability of drawing King of Hearts from Pack A = 1/51 (as Queen of Hearts is not to be drawn)
Probability of having King of Hearts on the top of the Pack B = 2/53
So total probability of case 1 = (1/51) * (2/53) = 2 / (51 * 53)
CASE 2 : King of Hearts is not drawn from Pack A
Probability of not drawing King of Hearts from Pack A = 50/51 (as Queen of Hearts is not to be
drawn)
Probability of having King of Hearts on the top of the Pack B = 1/53
So total probability of case 2 = (50/51) * (1/53) = 50 / (51 * 53)
Now adding both the probability, the required probability is
= 2 / (51 * 53) + 50 / (51 * 53)
= 52 / (51 * 53)
= 52 / 2703
= 0.0192378
8 Queens Problem
In how many ways can you arrange 8 queens on a standard chessboard in such a way that none of
them is attacking any other?
Answer
There are 92 ways of placing the 8 queens on the board. Some of such positions are :
1. A1, B5, C8, D6, E3, F7, G2, H4
2. A1, B6, C8, D3, E7, F4, G2, H5
3. A1, B7, C4, D6, E8, F2, G5, H3
4. A1, B7, C5, D8, E2, F4, G6, H3
The easiest way to solve this problem is by writing a computer program that systematically tries all
possibilities of placing the 8
queens on the board.
A man is going to an Antique Car auction. All purchases must be paid for in cash. He goes to the
bank and draws out $25,000.
.
Since the man does not want to be seen carrying that much money, he places it in 15 evelopes
numbered 1 through 15. Each
envelope contains the least number of bills possible of any available US currency (i.e. no two tens
in place of a twenty).
At the auction he makes a successful bid of $8322 for a car. He hands the auctioneer envelopes
number(s) 2, 8, and 14. After
opening the envelopes the auctioneer finds exactly the right amount.
How many ones did the auctioneer find in the envelopes?
Answer
Each envelope contains the money equal to the 2 raised to the envelope number minus 1. The
sentence "Each envelope
contains the least number of bills possible of any available US currency" is only to misguide you.
This is always possible for any
amount !!!
One more thing to notice here is that the man must have placed money in envelopes in such a way
that if he bids for any
amount less than $25000, he should be able to pick them in terms of envelopes.
First envelope contains, 20 = $1
Second envelope contains, 21 = $2
Third envelope contains, 22 = $4
Fourth envelope contains, 23 = $8 and so on...
Hence the amount in envelopes are $1, $2, $4, $8, $16, $32, $64, $128, $256, $512, $1024,
$2048, $4096, $8192, $8617
Last envelope (No. 15) contains only $8617 as total amount is only $25000.
Now as he bids for $8322 and gives envelope number 2, 8 and 14 which contains $2, $128 and
$8192 respectively.
Envelope No 2 conrains one $2 bill
Envelope No 8 conrains one $100 bill, one $20 bill, one $5 bill, one $2 bill and one $1 bill
Envelope No 14 conrains eighty-one $100 bill, one $50 bill, four $10 bill and one $2 bill
Hence the auctioneer will find one $1 bill in the envelopes.
There is a man who lives on the top floor of a very tall building. Everyday he gets the elevator
down to the ground floor to leave the
building to go to work.
Upon returning from work though, he can only travel half way up in the lift and has to walk the rest
of the way unless it's raining!
Why?
Answer
This is probably the best known and most celebrated of all lateral thinking puzzles. It is a true
classic.
The man is very, very short and can only reach halfway up the elevator buttons. However, if it is
raining then he will have his
umbrella with him and can press the higher buttons with it.
A man and his son are in a car accident. The father dies on the scene, but the child is rushed to
the hospital. When he arrives the
surgeon says, "I can't operate on this boy, he is my son!"
How can this be?
Answer
This is a lateral thinking puzzle.
.
The surgeon was his mother.
Also, the doctor could be the boy's biological father, and the man in the car could be the step or
legal father.
A man is wearing black. Black shoes, socks, trousers, jumper, gloves and balaclava. He is walking
down a black street with all the
street lamps off. A black car is coming towards him with its light off but somehow manages to stop
in time.
How did the driver see the man?
Answer
It was day time.
One day Kerry celebrated her birthday. Two days later her older twin brother, Terry, celebrated
his birthday.
How? Note that they both celebrated their birthday on their actual birthdays.
Answer
At the time she went into labor, the mother of the twins was traveling by boat. The older twin,
Terry, was born first early on
March 1st. The boat then crossed a time zone and Kerry, the younger twin, was born on February
the 28th. Therefore, the
younger twin celebrates her birthday two days before her older brother.
There is one more answer submitted by Beano.
She obviously had an older set of twin brothers and their birthday was 2 days after hers, they just
didn't mention that it was also
her other twin brothers birthday.
Also, according to Robbie TWINS DONT HAVE TO HAVE THE SAME BIRTHDAY!
SOME TWINS ARE BORN 300 DAYS
APART !!!
Why is it better to have round manhole covers than square ones?
Answer
This is a lateral thinking puzzle. Also, the MOST asked question during interview.
A square manhole cover can be turned and dropped down the diagonal of the manhole. A round
manhole cover cannot be
dropped down the manhole. So for safety and practicality, all manhole covers should be round.
A man went to a party and drank some of the punch. He then left early. Everyone else at the party
who drank the punch
subsequently died of poisoning.
.
Why did the man not die? Please note that he did not add the poison. Also, nothing was added to
punch after he left.
Answer
The poison in the punch came from the ice cubes. When the man drank the punch, the ice was
fully frozen. Gradually it melted,
poisoning the punch.
A woman had two sons who were born on the same hour of the same day of the same month of
the same year. But they were not
twins.
How could this be so?
Answer
They were two of a set of triplets (or quadruplets, etc.).
This puzzle stumps many people. They try outlandish solutions involving test-tube babies or
surrogate mothers. Why does the
Brain search for complex solutions when there is a much simpler one available?
Three friends check into a hotel for the night and the clerk tells them the bill is Rs. 30, payable in
advance. So, they each pay the
clerk RS. 10 and go to their room.
A few minutes later, the clerk realizes he has made an error and overcharged the trio by Rs 5. He
asks the hotel-boy to return Rs. 5
to the 3 friends who had just checked in. The hotel-boy sees this as an opportunity to make Rs. 2
as he reasons that the three
friends would have a tough time dividing Rs. 5 evenly among them; so he decides to tell them that
the clerk made a mistake of only
Rs. 3, giving a rupee back to each of the friends. He pockets the leftover Rs. 2 and goes home for
the day!
Now, each of the three friends gets a rupee back, thus they each paid Rs. 9 for the room which is a
total of Rs. 27 for the night. We
know the hotel-boy pocketed Rs. 2 and adding that to the Rs. 27, you get Rs. 29, not Rs. 30 which
was originally spent.
Where did the other rupee go???
Answer
The facts in this riddle are clear: There is an initial Rs. 30 charge. It should have been Rs. 25, so
Rs.5 must be returned and
accounted for. Rs. 3 is given to the 3 friends, Rs. 2 is kept by the hotel-boy - there you have the Rs.
5.
The trick to this riddle is that the addition and subtraction are done at the wrong times to misdirect
your thinking - and quite
successfully for most. Each of the 3 friends did indeed pay Rs. 9, not Rs. 10, and as far as the
friends are concerned, they paid
Rs. 27 for the night. But we know that the clerk will tell us that they were charged only Rs. 25 and
when you add the Rs. 3
returned with the Rs. 2 kept by the hotel-boy, you come up with Rs. 30
It happens once in a minute, twice in a week, and once in a year? What is it?
.
Answer
Letter 'e'
Sita has six pairs of black gloves and six pairs of brown gloves in her drawer.
In complete darkness, how many gloves must she take from the drawer in order to be sure to get a
matching pair (i.e. left hand and
right hand golves of the same color)? Think carefully!!
Answer
13
She could possibly take out 6 black left hand gloves and then 6 brown left hand gloves, the next
one would have to be either
the right hand or left hand match.
What is the largest possible number you can write using only 2 digits? (any two digits once or same
digit twice)
Answer
99
that is 9 * 9 * 9 *9 * 9 * 9 * 9 * 9 * 9 or 387,420,489
Because cigars cannot be entirely smoked, a Bobo who collects cigar butts can make a cigar to
smoke out of every 3 butts that he
finds.
Today, he has collected 27 cigar butts. How many cigars will he be able to smoke?
Answer
13 not 12
He makes 9 originals from the 27 butts he found, and after he smokes them he has 9 butts left for
another 3 cigars. And then
he has 3 butts for another cigar.
So 9+3+1=13
Someone at a party introduces you to your mother's only sister's husband's only sister-in-law. She
has no brothers.
What do you call this lady?
.
Answer
Mother or Mom
Two planes take off at the same exact moment. They are flying across the Atlantic. One leaves
New York and is flying to Paris at
500 miles per hour. The other leaves Paris and is flying to New York at only 450 miles per hour (
because of a strong head wind ).
Which one will be closer to Paris when they meet?
Answer
They will both be the same distance from Paris when they meet!!!
In your sock drawer, you have a ratio of 5 pairs of blue socks, 4 pairs of brown socks, and 6 pairs
of black socks.
In complete darkness, how many socks would you need to pull out to get a matching pair of the
same color?
Answer
4 If you don't agree, try it yourself!
In training for a competition, you find that swimming downstream (with the current) in a river, you
can swim 2 miles in 40 minutes, &
upstream (against the current), you can swim 2 miles in 60 minutes.
How long would it take you to swim a mile in still water?
Answer
You are able to swim downstream at 3 miles an hour, & upstream at 2 miles an hour. There is a
difference of 1 mile an hour,
which is the river helping you in 1 direction, & slowing you in the other direction.
Average the 2 rates, & you have the rate that you can swim in still water, which is 2.5 miles an hour.
You can thus swim a mile in still water in 24 minutes.
A woman goes into a hardware store to buy something for her house. When asked the price, the
clerk replies, "the price of one is
twelve cents, the price of forty-four is twenty-four cents, and the price a hundred and forty-four is
thirty-six cents.
What does the woman want to buy?
.
Answer
House numbers.
Price of one i.e. 1 = 12 cents (as only number 1)
Price of forty-four i.e. 44 = 24 cents (as there are two numbers)
Price of a hundred and forty-four i.e. 144 = 36 cents (as there are three numbers)
If you take a marker & start from a corner on a cube, what is the maximum number of edges you
can trace across if you never trace
across the same edge twice, never remove the marker from the cube, & never trace anywhere on
the cube, except for the corners
& edges?
Answer
9
To verify this, you can make a drawing of a cube, & number each of its 12 edges. Then, always
starting from 1 corner & 1 edge,
you can determine all of the possible combinations for tracing along the edges of a cube.
There is no need to start from other corners or edges of the cube, as you will only be repeating the
same combinations. The
process is a little more involved than this, but is useful for solving many types of spatial puzzles.
A cube is made of a white material, but the exterior is painted black.
If the cube is cut into 125 smaller cubes of exactly the same size, how many of the cubes will have
atleast 2 of their sides painted
black?
Answer
44
36 of the cubes have EXACTLY 2 of their sides painted black, but because a cube with 3 of its
sides painted black has 2 of its
sides painted black, you must also include the corner cubes. This was a trick question, but
hopefully the title of the puzzle
tipped you off to this.
In another galaxy, a certain nation of creatures speak a language known as Algramara. In this
language, "harvec tood zevac"
means "my tooth hurts", "lavec lina zevac" means "my delicious food", & "zevac corma lina" means
"eating my food".
What does "corma harvec zevac tood" mean?
Answer
There are 3 sentances:
1. "harvec tood zevac" means "my tooth hurts,"
2. "lavec lina zevac" means "my delicious food,"
3. "zevac corma lina" means "eating my food."
From (1), (2) & (3) "zevac" means my
From (2) & (3) "lina" means food
.
So From (3) "corma" means eating
and From (2) "lavec" means delicious
Now, two unknown words are there: "harvec" and "tood" which means tooth or hurts. So there are
two options:
1. Eating hurts my tooth
2. Eating tooth my hurts
Only first option makes sence. So "corma harvec zevac tood" means "Eating hurts my tooth"
PRIMAL SERIES
Decide what the next 5 figures in this series should be:
0110101000101000101000
Answer
10000
The title holds a hint, although this is still a tough puzzle. The series begins with the number 1, &
continues through 22, giving a
1 for each prime number, & a 0 for each number that is not prime.
Of the last 5 numbers (23-27), only 23 is prime
If you started a business in which you earned Rs.1 on the first day, Rs.3 on the second day, Rs.5 on
the third day, Rs.7 on the
fourth day, & so on.
How much would you have earned with this business after 50 years (assuming there are exactly 365
days in every year)?
Answer
Rs.333,062,500
To begin with, you want to know the total number of days: 365 x 50 = 18250.
By experimentation, the following formula can be discovered, & used to determine the amount
earned for any particular day: 1
+ 2(x-1), with x being the number of the day. Take half of the 18250 days, & pair them up with the
other half in the following
way: day 1 with day 18250, day 2 with day 18249, & so on, & you will see that if you add these pairs
together, they always
equal Rs.36500.
Multiply this number by the total number of pairs (9125), & you have the amount you would have
earned in 50 years.
Math gurus may use series formula to solve it.(series: 1,3,5,7,9,11.....upto 18250 terms)
A worker earns a 5% raise. A year later, the worker receives a 2.5% cut in pay, & now his salary is
Rs. 22702.68
What was his salary to begin with?
Answer
Rs.22176
.
Assume his salary was Rs. X
He earns 5% raise. So his salary is (105*X)/100
A year later he receives 2.5% cut. So his salary is ((105*X)/100)*(97.5/100) which is Rs. 22702.68
Hence, solving equation ((105*X)/100)*(97.5/100) = 22702.68
X = 22176
You have 9 marbles. 8 marbles weigh 1 ounce each, & one marble weighs 1.5 ounces. You are
unable to determine which is the
heavier marble by looking at them. You have a weighing scale that consists of 2 pans, but the scale
is only good for 2 total
weighings.
How can you determine which marble is the heaviest one using the scale & in 2 weighings?
Answer
Divide 9 marbles into 3 groups of 3 marbles each.
Take any 2 groups and place them on each pan. If they balance, remove the marbles from the
pans, & place any 2 of the
marbles from the remaining unweighed group on the pans, 1 on each pan.
If one is heavier, it is the heavier marble, but if they balance, the remaining unweighed marble is
the heavier one.
If your first weighing does not balance, remove the marbles from the lighter pan, & place 1 marble
on each pan from the
heavier pan. The heavier 1 is the 1.5 ounce marble, but if they balance, then the marble from the
heavy pan from the first
weighing that was not weighed in the second weighing is the heavy 1.
A group of 4 people, Andy, Brenda, Carl, & Dana, arrive in a car near a friend's house, who is
having a large party. It is raining
heavily, & the group was forced to park around the block from the house because of the lack of
available parking spaces due to the
large number of people at the party.
The group has only 1 umbrella, & agrees to share it by having Andy, the fastest, walk with each
person into the house, & then
return each time. It takes Andy 1 minute to walk each way, 2 minutes for Brenda, 5 minutes for
Carl, & 10 minutes for Dana. It thus
appears that it will take a total of 19 minutes to get everyone into the house.
However, Dana indicates that everyone can get into the house in 17 minutes by a different method.
How?
The individuals must use the umbrella to get to & from the house, & only 2 people can go at a
time (& no funny stuff like riding on
someone's back, throwing the umbrella, etc.)
Answer
There are 2 possible answers, both of which are almost the same:
Answer 1: Andy & Brenda walk together to the house (2 minutes), & Andy returns (1 minute). Carl
& Dana walk to the house
(10 minutes), & Brenda returns with the umbrella (2 minutes). Andy & Brenda walk to the house
again (2 minutes).
Answer 2: Andy & Brenda walk together to the house (2 minutes), & Brenda returns (2 minutes).
Carl & Dana walk to the
house (10 minutes), & Andy returns with the umbrella (1 minute). Andy & Brenda walk to the
house again (2 minutes).
.
You are in a room with 2 doors leading out. Behind 1 door is a coffer overflowing with jewels &
gold, along with an exit. Behind the
other door is an enormous, hungry lion that will pounce on anyone opening the door. You do not
know which door leads to the
treasure & exit, & which door leads to the lion.
In the room you are in, are 2 individuals. The first is a knight, who always tells the truth, & a knave,
who always lies. Both of these
individuals know what is behind each door. You do not know which individual is the knight, or
which one is the knave.
You may ask 1 of the individuals exactly 1 question. What should you ask in order to be certain
that you will open the door with the
coffer behind it, instead of the hungry lion?
Answer
There are 2 possible answers for this puzzle:
Answer 1: You ask one of the individuals what the other one would say if you asked him or her
which door you should open to
get to the coffer. In this case, you would open the other door.
Answer 2: You ask one of the individuals what the other one would say if you asked him or her
which door is holding back the
hungry lion. In this case, you would open this door.
A prisoner is told "If you tell a lie we will hang you; if you tell the truth we will shoot you."
What can he say to save himself? Note that he must say something to save himself.
Answer
You will hang me.
Find the next number in the series 11 12 20 23 33 46 .....
Answer
All the numbers given are the fibonacci numbers in increasing bases starting 2 !!!
Therefore,
11 = 3 base 2
12 = 5 base 3
20 = 8 base 4
23 = 13 base5 etc ...
Answer = 67 which is 55 base 8
(Fibonacci series : 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, 55, 89..... where next number is sum of the previous to
numbers.)
There are 20 poles with a constant distance between each pole. A car takes 24 second to reach the
12th pole.
How much will it take to reach the last pole.
Answer
.
The car will take 41.45 seconds to reach the last pole.
Let the distance between two poles is X.
The car takes 24 seconds to reach the 12th pole. It means it travels distance of 11X in 24 seconds.
To reach the 20th pole car has to travel 19X. So time taken to reach there is
= (19X * 24) / 11X
= (19 * 24) / 11
= 41.45 seconds
The minute and the hour hand of a watch meet every 65 minutes.
How much does the watch lose or gain time and by how much?
Answer
The minute and the hour hand meet 11 times in 12 hours in normal watch i.e. they meet after
every
= (12 * 60) / 11 minutes
= 65.45 minutes
= 65 minutes 27.16 seconds
But in our case they meet after every 65 minutes means the watch is gaining 27.16 seconds.
Father's age is three years more than three times the son's age. After three years, father's age will be
ten years more than twice the
son's age.
What is the father's present age?
Answer
Let son's present age is X years.
Hence, father's present age is (3X + 3) years.
After 3 years, son's age will be (X + 3) years.
and father's age will be (3X + 6) years.
But given that after 3 years father's age will be ten years more than twice the son's age.
(3X + 6) = 2 * (X + 3) + 10
3X + 6 = 2X + 16
X = 10
Therefore, father's present age is 33 years.
Below is a Quiz written by Einstein in the lst century.
He said 98% of the people in the world cannot solve the quiz. Are you among the other 2%?
FACTS
1. There are 5 houses in 5 different colors.
2. In each house lives a person with a different nationality.
.
3. These 5 owners drink a certain beverage, smoke a certain brand of cigar and keep a certain pet.
4. No owners have the same pet, smoke the same brand of cigar or drink the same drink.
HINTS
1. The Brit lives in a red house.
2. The Swede keeps dogs as pets.
3. The Dane drinks tea.
4. The green house is on the immediate left of the white house.
5. The green house owner drinks coffee.
6. The person who smokes Pall Mall rears birds.
7. The owner of the yellow house smokes Dunhill.
8. The man living in the house right in the center drinks milk.
9. The Norwegian lives in the first house.
10. The man who smokes blend lives next to the one who keeps cats.
11. The man who keeps horses lives next to the man who smokes Dunhill.
12. The owner who smokes Blue Master drinks beer.
13. The German smokes Prince.
14. The Norwegian lives next to the Blue House.
15. The man who smokes blend has a neighbor who drinks water.
THE QUESTION IS....WHO KEEPS FISH?
There is no trick to this - it needs deductive reasoning and definitely a pen and paper.
Answer
Nationality Beverage Cigar Pet House Color
------------------------------------------------------
Norwegian Water Dunhill Cat Yellow
Dane Tea Blend Horses Blue
Brit Milk Pall Mall Bird Red
German Coffee Prince Fish Green
Swede Beer Blue Master Dog White
Therefore the answer is the German.
I wonder if U could work it out by realizing that Einstien was a german and kept fish but that
would probably be cheating :)
There is one more possible answer, if we remove "immediate" from the Hint 4 i.e. read it as "The
green house is on the left of
the white house, not necessarily on the immediate left"
Nationality Beverage Cigar Pet House Color
------------------------------------------------------
Norwegian Coffee Blend Fish Green
German Water Prince Cats Blue
Swede Milk Dunhill Dogs Yellow
Brit Beer Blue Master Horses Red
Dane Tea Pall Mall Birds White
Thus, either German or Norwegian keeps the Fish, if the green house is not necessarily on the
immediate left of the white
house.
Thanks to Katie Crowe and friends for the second answer !!!
.
There are 3 ants at 3 corners of a triangle, they randomly start moving towards another corner.
What is the probability that they don't collide?
Answer
Let's mark the corners of the triangle as A,B,C. There are total 8 ways in which ants can move.
1. A->B, B->C, C->A
2. A->B, B->C, C->B
3. A->B, B->A, C->A
4. A->B, B->A, C->B
5. A->C, C->B, B->A
6. A->C, C->B, B->C
7. A->C, C->A, B->A
8. A->C, C->A, B->C
Out of which, there are only two cases under which the ants won't collide :
A->B, B->C, C->A
A->C, C->B, B->A
Therefore, probability of ants not colliding : 2/8 = 1/4
If you are on a boat and you throw out a suitcase, will the level of water increase? Please note that
the boat is in river and you
throw out a suitcase in the river.
Answer
No since the weight of the suitcase was already pushing on the water while it was on the boat.
You have two jars, 50 red marbles and 50 blue marbles. A jar will be picked at random, and then a
marble will be picked from the
jar. You can place maximum of 50 marbles in each jar.
Placing all of the marbles in the jars, how can you maximize the chances of a red marble being
picked? What are the exact odds of
getting a red marble using your scheme?
Answer
It doesn't matter how you put the marbles in the jar.
Chances of picking a Red marble is the same. i.e. 50%
Imagine that you have 26 constants, labelled A through Z. Each constant is assigned a value in the
following way: A = 1; the rest of
the values equal their position in the alphabet (B corresponds to the second position so it equals 2,
C = 3, etc.) raised to the power
of the preceeding constant value. So, B = 2 ^ (A's value), or B = 2^1 = 2. C = 3^2 = 9. D = 4^9, etc.
.
Find the exact numerical value to the following equation: (X - A) * (X - B) * (X - C) * ... * (X - Y) *
(X - Z)
Answer
(X - A) * (X - B) * (X - C) * ... * (X - Y) * (X - Z) equals 0 since (X - X) is zero.
You have someone working for you for seven days and a gold bar to pay them. The gold bar is
segmented into seven connected
pieces. You must give them a piece of gold at the end of every day.
If you are only allowed to make two breaks in the gold bar, how do you pay your worker?
Answer
Make two breaks such that you get three segments with 1 piece, 2 pieces and 4 pieces and follow as
below:
Day 1 : Give a single segment to the worker.
Day 2 : Ask the worker to return the segment you gave him on day 1 and give him the segment
with Two connected pieces.
Day 3 : GIve the worker the 1 piece segment you have.
Day 4 : Ask the worker to return all pieces he has (one segment and 2 segment pieces) and give
him the segment with 4 pieces
on it.
Day 5 : Give him the the segment with 1 piece.
Day 6 : Ask him to return the 1 piece segment and give him the segment with two pieces.
Day 7 : Give him the 1 piece segment you have.
A man throws an object a certain distance; it stops momentarily and returns. It is not a boomerang
and does not touch anything.
How?
Answer
The man throws the object vertically upward, perpendicular to the ground.
When you throw an object vertically up, it stops for a moment and then returns back.
Three friends divided some bullets equally. After all of them shot 4 bullets the total number of
bullets remaining is equal to the
bullets each had after division. Find the original number divided.
Answer
18
Assume that initial there were 3*X bullets.
So they got X bullets each after division.
All of them shot 4 bullets. So now they have (X - 4) bullets each.
But it is given that,after they shot 4 bullets each, total number of bullets remaining is equal to the
bullets each had after division
i.e. X
.
Therefore, the equation is
3 * (X - 4) = X
3 * X - 12 = X
2 * X = 12
X=6
Therefore the total bullets before division is = 3 * X = 18
A farmer needs 8 gallons of water. He has only three unmared buckets, two 6 gallon and one 11
gallon bucket.
How can he collect 8 gallons of water using three unmarked buckets? Provide solution with
minimal water wastage.
Answer
Here is the solution with 10 gallon water wastage.
OPERATIONS 6 6 11
Fill 6 gallon bucket with water 6 0 0
Empty 6 gallon bucket into 11 gallon bucket 0 0 6
Fill 6 gallon bucket with water 6 0 6
Fill 11 gallon bucket to full using filled 6 gallon bucket. This will leave 1 gallon water in 6 gallon
bucket 1 0 11
Empty 11 gallon bucket into second 6 gallon bucket. 1 6 5
Empty 11 gallon bucket - wastage of 5 gallon water 1 6 0
Empty second 6 gallon bucket into 11 gallon bucket 1 0 6
Fill seccond 6 gallon bucket with water 1 6 6
Fill 11 gallon bucket to full using filled second 6 gallon bucket. This will leave 1 gallon water in
second 6 gallon
bucket 1 1 11
Fill first 6 gallon bucket with 1 gallon water which is in second 6 gallon bucket 2 0 11
Empty 11 gallon bucket into second 6 gallon bucket. 2 6 5
Empty 11 gallon bucket - wastage of 5 gallon water 2 6 0
Fill 11 gallon bucket with water in both the 6 gallon buckets 0 0 11
A ship went on a voyage. After it had travelled 180 miles a plane statrted with 10 times the speed of
the ship. Find the distance
when they meet from starting point.
Answer
200 miles
Given that speed of the plane is 10 times the speed of the ship. So it is obvious that the distance
covered by plane will be 10
times the distance covered by the ship for the given time.
i.e. Distance covered by plane = 10 * (Distance covered by ship after plane started)
Now from the given data,
Distance covered by plane = 180 + Distance covered by ship after plane started
10 * (Distance covered by ship after plane started) = 180 + Distance covered by ship after plane
started
9 * (Distance covered by ship after plane started) = 180
Distance covered by ship after plane started = 20 miles
.
Total distance covered by ship from starting point
= 180 + 20
= 200 miles
If you look at a clock and the time is 3:15.
What is the angle between the hour and the minute hands? ( The answer to this is not zero!)
Answer
7.5 degrees
At 3:15 minute hand will be perfactly horizontal pointing towards 3. Whereas hour hand will be
towards 4. Also, hour hand must
have covered 1/4 of angle between 3 and 4.
The angle between two adjacent digits is 360/12 = 30 degrees.
Hence 1/4 of it is 7.5 degrees.
There were two men standing on a street. The one says to the other, "I have 3 daughters, the
product of their ages is 36. What is
the age of the OLDEST daughter?"
The second guy says, "I need more information." So, the first guy says, "The sum of their ages is
equal to the address of the house
across the street."
The second guy looks at the address and says, "I still need more information." So, the first guy says,
"My oldest daughter wears a
red dress."
Answer
The answer is 9 years.
First you need to find all the possible sets of three numbers that when multiplied equals 36:
1 1 36
1 2 18
1 3 12
149
166
229
236
334
Then you add the numbers together to find the sum
1 1 36 = 38
1 2 18 = 21
1 3 12 = 16
1 4 9 = 14
1 6 6 = 13
2 2 9 = 13
2 3 6 = 11
3 3 4 = 10
Even though we don't know the address the guy knows it. For him to need more information that
means that at least two of the
sets of numbers has the same sum. Two of them do, 1 6 6 and 2 2 9.
When the first guy said that his OLDEST daugher wears a red dress that meant that there had to
be the oldest. So 1 6 6 can't
possibly be the answer. So the possible possiblity is 2 2 9 and the OLDEST daughter is 9 years
old.
Therefore, the answer is 9.
.
In a certain game, if 2 wixsomes are worth 3 changs, and 4 changs are worth 1 plut, then 6 plutes
are worth how many wixsomes?
Answer
It is given that
2 wixsomes = 3 changs
8 wixsomes = 12 changs ----- (I)
Also, given that
4 changs = 1 plut
12 changs = 3 plutes
8 wixsomes = 3 plutes ----- From (I)
Therefore,
6 plutes = 16 wixsomes
A hole that is 3 feet deep, and 6 inches in diameter, has how much dirt in it..?
Answer
A tricky one.
It's a hole. So there is no dirt in it.
The Bulls, Pacers, Lakers and Jazz ran for a contest.
Anup, Sujit, John made the following statements regarding results.
Anup said either Bulls or Jazz will definitely win
Sujit said he is confident that Bulls will not win
John said he is confident that neither Jazz nor Lakers will win
When the result came, it was found that only one of the above three had made a correct statement.
Who has made the correct
statement and who has won the contest?
Answer
Sujith has made the correct statement and Lakers has won the contest.
Let's solve it. Create the table with the statements made.
Bulls Pacers Lakers Jazz
Anup YES YES
Sujit NO
John NO NO
.
Now let's analyse the situation by assuming that Anup has made the correct statement. It means
that either Bulls or Jazz has
won the contest.
If bulls has won, then John is also correct
If Jazz has won, then Sujit is also correct.
In either case Anup has made the wrong statement.
Now assume that Sujit has made the correct statement. It means that either or Pacers or Lakers or
Jazz won the contest.
If Pacers has won, then John is also correct.
If Jazz has won, then Anup is also correct.
If Lakers has won, then Anup and John both are wrong.
So is the answer - Sujit has made the correct statement and Lakers won the contest.
Similarly, analyse for john which means either Bulls or Pacershas won the contest.
Everyday in his business a merchant had to weigh amounts from 1 kg to 121 kgs, to the nearest kg.
What are the minimum number
of different weights required and how heavy should they be?
Answer
The minimum number is 5 and they should weigh 1, 3, 9, 27 and 81 kgs.
Four prisoners escape from a prison.
The prisoners, Mr. East, Mr. West, Mr. South, Mr. North head towards different directions after
escaping.
The following information of their escape was supplied:
The escape routes were North Road, South Road, East Road and West Road
None of the prisoners took the road which was their namesake
Mr. East did not take the South Road
Mr.West did not the South Road
The West Road was not taken by Mr. East
What road did each of the prisoners take to make their escape?
Answer
Put all the given information into the table structure as follow:
North Road South Road East Road West Road
Mr. North No
Mr. South No
Mr. East No No No
Mr. West No No
Now from table, two things are obvious and they are:
.
Mr.North took the South Road
Mr.East took the North Road
Put this information into the table, Also keep in mind that the prisoners head towards different
directions after escaping.
North Road South Road East Road West Road
Mr. North No YES No No
Mr. South No No
Mr. East YES No No No
Mr. West No No No
Now from the table:
Mr.West took the East Road
Mr.South took the West Road
So the answer is:
Mr.North took the South Road
Mr.South took the West Road
Mr.East took the North Road
Mr.West took the East Road
I bought a car with a peculiar 5 digit numbered licence plate which on reversing could still be read.
On reversing value is increased
by 78633.
Whats the original number if all digits are different?
Answer
Only 0 1 6 8 and 9 can be read upside down. So on rearranging these digits we get the answer as
10968.
Shahrukh speaks truth only in the morning and lies in the afternoon, whereas Salman speaks truth
only in the afternoon and lies in
the morning.
A says that B is Shahrukh.
Is it morning or afternoon and who is A - Shahrukh or Salman?
Answer
It is Afternoon and A can be Salman or Shahrukh. If A is Salman, he is speaking truth. If A is
Shahrukh, he is lying.
Want to confirm it? Consider following 4 possible answers and check for its truthness individually.
.
1. It is Morning and A is Shahrukh
2. It is Morning and A is Salman
3. It is Afternoon and A is Shahrukh
4. It is Afternoon and A is Salman
Next number in the series is 1, 2, 4, 13, 31, 112, ?
Answer
224
A tough one. But analyse the series carefully. No number has digits more than 4. So try to convert
them to decimal numbers
from base 5 numbers. (just try that) So it turns out to be:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16 , 32 , ?
Got it !!! Next number should be 64. But all numbers in actual series are base 5 numbers So
convert 64 to base 5 and that is
224.
Next number in the series is 1, 2, 4, 13, 31, 112, ?
Answer
224
A tough one. But analyse the series carefully. No number has digits more than 4. So try to convert
them to decimal numbers
from base 5 numbers. (just try that) So it turns out to be:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16 , 32 , ?
Got it !!! Next number should be 64. But all numbers in actual series are base 5 numbers So
convert 64 to base 5 and that is
224.
Jack and Jill are playing cards for a stake of $1 a game. At the end of the evening, Jack has won 3
games and Jill has won $3. How
many games did they play?
Submitted by : Nathalie Drouin
Answer
They played total of 9 games. Jack won 3 games and Jill won 6 games.
If Jack has won three games and Jill has won $3, she lost a dollar for each loss, therefore she has
won 6 and lost 3 to make $3
and he won the other 3 that she lost!
.
A soldier looses his way in a thick jungle. At random he walks from his camp but mathematically
in an interesting fashion.
First he walks one mile East then half mile to North. Then 1/4 mile to West, then 1/8 mile to
South and so on making a loop.
Finally how far he is from his camp and in which direction?
Answer
The soldier is 0.8944 miles away from his camp towards East-North.
It is obvious that he is in East-North direction.
Distance travelled in North and South directions
= 1/2 - 1/8 + 1/32 - 1/128 + 1/512 - 1/2048 + and so on... (a geometric series with r = (-1/4) )
(1/2) * ( 1 - (-1/4)n )
= ---------------------------
( 1 - (-1/4) )
= 1 / ( 2 * ( 1 - (-1/4) ) )
= 2/5
Similarly in East and West directions
= 1 - 1/4 + 1/16 - 1/64 + 1/256 - and so on... (a geometric series with r = (-1/4) )
(1) * ( 1 - (-1/4)n )
= ---------------------------
( 1 - (-1/4) )
= 1 / ( ( 1- (-1/4) )
= 4/5
So the soldier is 4/5 miles away towards East and 2/5 miles away towards North. So using right
angled triangle, soldier is
0.8944 miles away from his camp.
How can 1,000,000,000 be written as a product of two factors neither of them containing zeros?
Answer
29 * 59 or
(2 * 5)9
Solution submitted by Craig :
512 * 1,953,125 = 1,000,000,000
A person with some money spends 1/3 for cloths, 1/5 of the remaining for food and 1/4 of the
remaining for travel. He is left with Rs
100/-
How much did he have with him in the begining?
Answer
Rs. 250/-
.
Assume that initially he had Rs. X
He spent 1/3 for cloths =. (1/3) * X
Remaining money = (2/3) * X
He spent 1/5 of remaining money for food = (1/5) * (2/3) * X = (2/15) * X
Remaining money = (2/3) * X - (2/15) * X = (8/15) * X
Again, he spent 1/4 of remaining maoney for travel = (1/4) * (8/15) * X = (2/15) * X
Remaining money = (8/15) * X - (2/15) * X = (6/15) * X
But after spending for travel he is left with Rs. 100/- So
(6/15) * X = 100
X = 250
There is a perfect sphere of diameter 40 cms. resting up against a perfectly straight wall and a
perfectly straight floor i.e. the wall and the floor make a perfect right angle.
Can a perfect sphere of diameter 7 cms. pass through the space between the big sphere, the wall
and the floor? Support your answer with valid arguments. Don't submit just "Yes" or "No".
Answer
For the sake of simplicity, consider two-dimension i.e view sphere as a two dimensional circle with
diameter 40 cms.
From Figure I, (40 cms diameter sphere)
OC2 = OD2 + CD2
OC2 = 202 + 202
OC = 28.28427 cms
Also, X is the closest point to origin O on the sphere.
CX = 20 cms (radius)
OX = OC - CX
OX = 28.28427 - 20
OX = 8.28427 cms
From Figure II, (7 cms diameter sphere)
OP2 = OQ2 + PQ2
OP2 = (3.5)2 + (3.5)2
OP = 4.94974 cms
Also, Y is the farthest point to origin O on the sphere.
PY = 3.5 cms (radius)
OY = OP + PY
OY = 4.94974 + 3.5
OY = 8.44974 cms
Now, as OY > OX i.e. smaller sphere requires more space than the space available. Hence,
smaller sphere of 7 cms diameter
can not pass through the space between the big sphere, the wall and the floor.
The puzzle can be solved by another method.
Draw a line tangent to the big sphere at the point X such that X is the closest point to the origin O
on sphere. The tanget will cut
X and Y axes at A and B respectively such that OA=OB. [See Fig III] From above, OX=8.28427
cms.
.
From the right angle triangle OAB, we can deduct that
OA = OB = 11.71572 cms
AB = 16.56854 cms
Now, the diameter of the inscribed circle of right angle triangle is given by d = a + b - c where a <=
b<c
The maximum possible diameter of the circle which can pass through the space between the big
sphere, the wall and the floor
is
= OA + OB - AB
= 11.71572 + 11.71572 - 16.56854
= 6.86291 cms
Hence, the sphere with 7 cms diameter can not pass through the space between the big sphere, the
wall and the floor.
Bob's mom had three children Penny, Nickel and who was the third one?
Submitted by : whitney dunlap
Answer
Bob
If a rooster is on top of a house and the rooster lays an egg which way will the egg fall down the
house.
Answer
Neither. Roosters don't lay eggs.
If a plane crashes on the border of Mexico and New Mexico, where will they bury the survivors?
Answer
Nowhere. You don't bury survivors !!!
What is greater then GOD, worse then devil, dead men eat it and live men will die if they eat it?
Submitted by : ken
.
Answer
The answer is "NOTHING"
NOTHING is greater then god. NOTHING is worse then the devil, dead men eat NOTHING
and if men eat NOTHING, they die.
Similar riddle:
What lasts forever, but if you eat it you will die?
What can you put into a barrel but you cannot take out? When you put it in it makes the barrel
lighter.
Submitted by : Lancer 2006
Answer
A Hole !!!
What are the next two numbers in the series?
34, 58, 56, 60, 42, 52, 65, ?, ?
Answer
The next two numbers are 49 and 42.
The pattern is : the totals of the letters in the words ONE, TWO, THREE, FOUR, FIVE, SIX,
SEVEN, EIGHT and NINE when
A=1, B=2, C=3, D=4 and so on.
First number = 15(O) + 14(N) + 5(E) = 34
Second Number = 20(T) + 23(W) + 15(O) = 58
Third Number = 20(T) + 8(H) + 18(R) + 5(E) + 5(E) = 56
Fourth Number = 6(F) + 15(O) + 21(U) + 18(R) = 60
Fifth Number = 6(F) + 9(I) + 22(V) + 5(E) = 42
Sixth Number = 19(S) + 9(I) + 24(X) = 52
Seventh Number = 19(S) + 5(E) + 22(V) + 5(E) + 14(N) = 65
Eight Number = 5(E) + 9(I) + 7(G) + 8(H) + 20(T) = 49
Ninth Number = 14(N) + 9(I) + 14(N) + 5(E) = 42
It is raining outside and a man decides to take a walk. He goes outside with nothing but his shirt on
his back, jeans on his legs and
shoes on his feet, yet not one hair on his head gets wet. Why is that?
Submitted by : Castill Hightower
Answer
The man is bald. As there are no hair on his head, no hair gets wet.
There is a man who is looking at a picture. He is the only son in the family and his dad has no
siblings.
.
He says, "This person's father is my father's son".
Who is this person in the picture?
Submitted by : Julie Nguyen
Answer
The person in the picture is his CHILD.
He is saying that "this person's father, is my father's son." Now, my father's son is himself as he is
the only son in the family.
And he is the father of the person in picture. Hence the person in picture is his son or daughter.
There was a man who had just hung himself. When you search the room where it happend all you
can see is the young man
hanging and a puddle of water below him. There are no objects or furniture that could have
helped him to commit suicide.
How did he kill himself?
Submitted by : beka chesse
Answer
The man stood on a block of ice. When it melted, he hung himself or he jumped off and hung
himself.
Before Mount Everest was discovered, what was the largest mountain above water on Earth ?
Submitted by : kukuchuboo
Answer
Mount Everest
Mount Everest was the largest mountain above water on the Earth before it was discovered. People
just didn't know that it
existed.
There are four groups of Mangoes, Apples and Bananas as follows:
Group I : 1 Mango, 1 Apples and 1 Banana
Group II : 1 Mango, 5 Apples and 7 Bananas
Group III : 1 Mango, 7 Apples and 10 Bananas
Group IV : 9 Mango, 23 Apples and 30 Bananas
Group II costs Rs 300 and Group III costs Rs 390.
Can you tell how much does Group I and Group IV cost?
Answer
Group I costs Rs 120 and Group IV costs Rs 1710
Assume that the values of one mango, one apple and one banana are M, A and B respectively.
From Group II : M + 5A + 7B = 300
From Group III : M + 7A + 10B = 390
Subtracting above to equations : 2A + 3B = 90
.
For Group I :
=M+A+B
= (M + 5A + 7B) - (4A + 6B)
= (M + 5A + 7B) - 2(2A + 3B)
= 300 - 2(90)
= 300 - 180
= 120
Similarly, for Group IV :
= 9M + 23A + 30B
= 9(M + 5A + 7B) - (22A + 33B)
= 9(M + 5A + 7B) - 11(2A + 3B)
= 9(300) - 11(90)
= 2700 - 990
= 1710
Thus, Group I costs Rs 120 and Group IV costs Rs 1710.
There are 3 colored boxes - Red, Green and Blue. Each box contains 2 envelopes. Each envelope
contains money - two of them
contain Rs. 25000 each, two of them contain Rs. 15000 each and remaining two contain Rs. 10000
each.
There is one statement written on the cover of each box.
* Red Box: Both, a red box and a blue box contain Rs. 10000 each.
* Green Box: Both, a green box and a red box contain Rs. 25000 each.
* Blue Box: Both, a blue box and a green box contain Rs. 15000 each.
Only one of the above 3 statements is true and the corresponding box contains the maximum
amount.
Can you tell which box contains the maximum amount and how much?
Answer
Blue box contains the maximum amount Rs. 40000
As it is given that only one of the given 3 statements is true; assume in turn, each statement to be
true & the other 2 false and
check whether the corresponding box contains the maximum amount.
Let's assume that the statement on the Blue box is true. Thus, the given 3 statements can be
interpreted as
* Atmost one, a red box or a blue box contains Rs. 10000.
* Atmost one, a green box or a red box contains Rs. 25000.
* Both, a blue box and a green box contain Rs. 15000 each.
Going through all possible combinations, we can conclude that
Red Box : Rs. 10000 + Rs. 25000 = Rs. 35000
Green Box : Rs. 10000 + Rs. 15000 = Rs. 25000
Blue Box : Rs. 15000 + Rs. 25000 = Rs. 40000
You can test out for other two statements i.e. assuming Red box statement true and then Green
box statement true. In both the
cases, other statements will contradict the true statement.
A Father asks his son to go shopping for apples one day. He gives his son exactly 100 pence and
instructs that he must spend all
of it and buy exactly 100 apples from the market.
The market sells three kinds of apples. Good apples are priced at 10 pence, Average apples at 5
pence and Rotten apples at 0.5
pence.
It does not matter what type of apples the boy buys. How many of each apple must the boy buy in
order to fulfil his father's
.
instructions.
Submitted by : Vincent Kamal Murray
Answer
Assume that the son will buy total of X apples of 10 pence each, Y apples of 5 pence each and Z
apples of 0.5 pence each.
As the son must buy 100 apples,
X + Y + Z = 100 ----------I
Also, the total price must be 100 pence,
10 * X + 5 * Y + 0.5 * Z = 100
20 * X + 10 * Y + Z = 200 ----------II
Subtracting equation I from equation II,
19 * X + 9 * Y = 100
It is obvious that values of X, Y and Z are integers. So using trial and error, X = 1 and Y = 9
Using values of X and Y, Z = 90
1 Good apple = 10 pence
9 Average apple = 45 pence
90 rotten apples = 45 pence
Hence, total of 100 apples for 100 pence.
Sachin, Dravid and Ganguly played in a Cricket match between India and England.
None of them scored more than 99 runs.
If you add the digits of the runs scored by Sachin to his own score, you will get the runs scored
by Dravid.
If you reverse the digits of the runs scored by Dravid, you will get the runs scored by Ganguly.
The total runs scored by them is 240.
Can you figure out their individual scores?
Answer
Sachin, Dravid and Ganguly scored 75, 87 and 78 respectively.
Sachin's score must be less than 86, otherwise Dravid's score would be more than 99. Also, he
must have scored atleast 42 -
incase Dravid and Ganguly scored 99 each.
Also, as none of them scored more than 99 and the total runs scored by them is 240; their
individual scores must be around 80.
Now, use trial-n-error method to solve the teaser.
Jack and Jill were found dead one morning on the floor of a room. Neither had any scratches or
bruises on their bodies, but their is
broken glass and water all around them.
No chemicals or poisons are in their bodies. The only other thing in the room is a table.
How did Jack and Jill die?
Submitted by : Kirsten
Answer
.
Jack and Jill were fish. Their fishbowl fell off the table and they died because of lack of water. 0;-)
A man comes into town on Friday and leaves three days later on Friday.
How does he do it?
Submitted by : Michaela
Answer
The man's horse name is Friday and he left the town on horse. So left on Friday. 0;-)
As I was traveling to St.Petersberg I saw a man with 7 wives, with 7 kittens, in 7 sacks, and with 7
drinks on a bike.
How many people/things are going to St. Petersberg?
Submitted by : Mark b
Answer
One man is traveling to St. Petersberg.
It said as I saw a man with 7 wives, with 7 kittens, in 7 sacks, and with 7 drinks, on a bike. He only
saw them, so they didnot
count. Hence, he is the only person that is actually going.
Teaser No : 00151
Assume that you have enough coins of 1, 5, 10, 25 and 50 cents.
How many ways are there to make change for a dollar? Do explain your answer.
Answer
There are 292 ways to make change for a dollar using coins of 1, 5, 10, 25 and 50 cents.
Let's generalised the teaser and make a table as shown above.
If you wish to make change for 75 cents using only 1, 5, 10 and 25 cent coins, go to the .25 row
and the 75 column to obtain
121 ways to do this.
The table can be created from left-to-right and top-to-bottom. Start with the top left i.e. 1 cent row.
There is exactly one way to
make change for every amount. Then calculate the 5 cents row by adding the number of ways to
make change for the amount
using 1 cent coins plus the number of ways to make change for 5 cents less using 1 and 5 cent
coins.
Let's take an example:
.
To get change for 50 cents using 1, 5 and 10 cent coins.
* 50 cents change using 1 and 5 cent coins = 11 ways
* (50-10) 40 cents change using 1, 5 and 10 cent coins = 25 ways
* 50 cents change using 1, 5 and 10 cent coins = 11+25 = 36 ways
Let's take another example:
To get change for 75 cents using all coins up to 50 cent i.e. 1, 5, 10, 25 and 50 cents coins.
* 75 cents change using coins upto 25 cent = 121 ways
* (75-50) 25 cents change using coins upto 50 cent = 13 ways
* 75 cents change using coins upto 50 cent = 121+13 = 134 ways
For people who don't want to tease their Brain and love to do computer
programming, there is a simple way. Write a small multiloop
program to solve the equation: A + 5B + 10C + 25D + 50E = 100
where,
A = 0 to 100
B = 0 to 20
C = 0 to 10
D = 0 to 4
E = 0 to 2
The program should output all the possible values of A, B, C, D and E for which the equation is
satisfied.
There is a river and 3 people. Two people weigh 50 lbs and one of them weighs 100 lbs. The only
way you can cross the river is by
using a boat.
How can they all cross the river if the boat only can hold 100 lbs?
Submitted by : BeCkA
Answer
1. Both 50 pound persons will cross the river.
2. One of the 50 pound person will come back.
3. Now, 100 pound person will cross the river alone.
4. 50 pound person will come back who is at the other end of the river.
5. Again both 50 pound persons will cross the river together.
In a Road Race, one of the three bikers was doing 15km less than the first and 3km more than the
third. He also finished the race
12 minutes after the first and 3 minutes before the third.
Can you find out the speed of each biker, the time taken by each biker to finish the race and the
length of the course?
Assume that there were no stops in the race and also they were driving with constant speeds
through out the race.
Answer
.
Let us assume that
Speed of First biker = V1 km/min
Speed of Second biker = V2 km/min
Speed of Third biker = V3 km/min
Total time take by first biker = T1 min
Total distance = S km
Now as per the data given in the teaser, at a time T min
X1 = V1 * T ----> 1
X1 - 15 = V2 * T ----> 2
X1 - 18 = V3 * T ----> 3
At a Distance S Km.
S = V1 * T1 ----> 4
S = V2 * (T1 + 12) ----> 5
S = V3 * (T1 + 15) ----> 6
Thus there are 6 equations and 7 unknown data that means it has infinite number of solutions.
By solving above 6 equations we get,
Time taken by first biker, T1 = 60 Min.
Time taken by Second biker, T2 = 72 Min.
Time taken by first biker, T3 = 75 Min.
Also, we get
Speed of first biker, V1 = 90/T km/min
Speed of second biker, V2 = (5/6)V1 = 75/T km/min
Speed of third biker, V3 = (4/5)V1 = 72/T km/min
Also, the length of the course, S = 5400/T km
Thus, for the data given, only the time taken by each biker can be found i.e. 60, 72 and 75
minutes. For other quantities, one
more independent datum is required i.e. either T or V1 or V2 or V3
Thanks to Theertham Srinivas for the answer !!!
There are 4 mugs placed upturned on the table. Each mug have the same number of marbles and
a statement about the number of
marbles in it. The statements are: Two or Three, One or Four, Three or One, One or Two.
Only one of the statement is correct. How many marbles are there under each mug?
.
Answer
A simple one.
As it is given that only one of the four statement is correct, the correct number can not appear in
more than one statement. If it
appears in more than one statement, then more than one statement will be correct.
Hence, there are 4 marbles under each mug.
Which is heavier a pound of bricks or a pound of feathers?
Submitted by : Priscilla M
Answer
Both of them weigh one pound. So neither is heavier than the other, both are same.
Note
The pound is the name for at least three different units of mass: the pound (avoirdupois), the troy
pound, and the obsolete
imperial pound.
Gold is measured in "troy" pounds which is lighter
than "Avoirdupois" pounds which is most commonly used. "Imperial" units are still predominantly
used in the United States.
So if a pound of gold is measured in troy pounds and feathers in Avoirdupois pounds, then gold is
lighter.
The game of Tic-Tac-Toe is being played between two players. Only the last mark to be placed in
the game as shown.
Who will win the game, O or X? Can you tell which was the sixth mark and at which position? Do
explain your answer.
Assume that both the players are intelligent enough.
Answer
O will win the game. The sixth mark was X in square 9.
The 7th mark must be placed in square 5 which is the win situation for both X and O. Hence, the
6th mark must be placed in a
line already containing two of the opponents marks. There are two such possibilities - the 6th mark
would have been either O in
square 7 or X in square 9.
As we know both the players are intelligent enough, the 6th mark could not be O in square 7.
Instead, he would have placed O
in square 5 and would have won.
Hence, the sixth mark must be X placed in square 9. And the seventh mark will be O. Thus O will
win the game.
Consider the sum: ABC + DEF + GHI = JJJ
If different letters represent different digits, and there are no leading zeros, what does J represent?
.
Answer
The value of J must be 9.
Since there are no leading zeros, J must be 7, 8, or 9. (JJJ = ABC + DEF + GHI = 14? + 25? + 36?
= 7??)
Now, the remainder left after dividing any number by 9 is the same as the remainder left after
dividing the sum of the digits of
that number by 9. Also, note that 0 + 1 + ... + 9 has a remainder of 0 after dividing by 9 and JJJ has
a remainder of 0, 3, or 6.
The number 9 is the only number from 7, 8 and 9 that leaves a remainder of 0, 3, or 6 if you
remove it from the sum 0 + 1 + ... +
9. Hence, it follows that J must be 9.
Each of the five characters in the word BRAIN has a different value between 0 and
9. Using the given grid, can you find out the
value of each character?
B R A I N 31
B B R B A 31
N I A B B 32
N I B A I 30
I R A A A 23
37 29 25 27 29
The numbers on the extreme right represent the sum of the values represented by the characters
in that row. Also, the numbers on
the last raw represent the sum of the values represented by the characters in that column. e.g. B +
R + A + I + N = 31 (from first
row)
Answer
B=7, R=6, A=4, I=5 and N=9
Make total 10 equations - 5 for rows and 5 for columns - and sovle them.
From Row3 and Row4,
N+I+A+B+B=N+I+B+A+I+2
B=I+2
From Row1 and Row3,
B+R+A+I+N=N+I+A+B+B-1
R=B-1
From Column2,
R + B + I + I + R = 29
B + 2R + 2I = 29
B + 2(B - 1) + 2I = 29
3B + 2I = 31
3(I + 2) + 2I = 31
5I = 25
I=5
Hence, B=7 and R=6
From Row2,
B + B + R + B + A = 31
3B + R + A = 31
3(7) + 6 + A = 31
A=4
From Row1,
B + R + A + I + N = 31
7 + 6 + 4 + 5 + N = 31
.
N=9
Thus, B=7, R=6, A=4, I=5 and N=9
A family photo contained:
one grandfather, one grandmother;
two fathers, two mothers;
six children, four grandchildren;
two brothers, two sisters;
three sons, three daughters;
one father-in-law, one mother-in-law, one daughter-in-law, one son-in-law
30 people you may think, but no, what is the least number of people here?
Answer
There are total 8 people.
Four children - 2 boys and 2 girls, their mother and father, and one set of grandparents - EITHER
mother's mother and father's
father OR mother's father and father's mother.
At the Party:
1. There were 9 men and children.
2. There were 2 more women than children.
3. The number of different man-woman couples possible was 24. Note that if there were 7 men
and 5 women, then there
would have been 35 man-woman couples possible.
Also, of the three groups - men, women and children - at the party:
4. There were 4 of one group.
Exactly one of the above 6 statements is false.
Can you tell which one is false? Also, how many men, women and children are there at the party?
Answer
Statement (4) is false. There are 3 men, 8 women and 6 children.
Assume that Statements (4), (5) and (6) are all true. Then, Statement (1) is false. But then
Statement (2) and (3) both can not
be true. Thus, contradictory to the fact that exactly one statement is false.
So Statement (4) or Statement (5) or Statement (6) is false. Also, Statements (1), (2) and (3) all are
true.
From (1) and (2), there are 11 men and women. Then from (3), there are 2 possible cases - either
there are 8 men and 3
women or there are 3 men and 8 women.
If there are 8 men and 3 women, then there is 1 child. Then Statements (4) and (5) both are false,
which is not possible.
Hence, there are 3 men, 8 women and 6 children. Statement (4) is false.
.
What belongs to you, but is almost entirely used by other people?
Submitted by : HappyGirl
Answer
Your Name
Your Name belongs to you, but is almost entirely used by others in day-to-day life.
Substitute digits for the letters to make the following relation true.
WORLD
+TRADE
-------------
CENTER
Note that the leftmost letter can't be zero in any word. Also, there must be a one-to-one mapping
between digits and letters. e.g. if
you substitute 3 for the letter W, no other letter can be 3 and all other W in the puzzle must be 3.
Answer
A tough one.
It is obvious that C=1. Also, the maximum possible value of E is 7. Now, start putting possible
values of D, E and R as they
occure frequently and use trial-n-error.
WORLD53684
+TRADE+76042
------------ ------------
CENTER129726
A fish had a tail as long as its head plus a quarter the lenght of its body. Its body was three-quarters
of its total length. Its head was
4 inches long.
What was the length of the fish?
Submitted by : Calon
Answer
The fish is 128 inches long.
It is obvious that the lenght of the fish is the summation of lenghts of the head, the body and the
tail. Hence,
Fish (F) = Head (H) + Body (B) + Tail (T)
But it is given that the lenght of the head is 4 inches i.e. H = 4. The body is three-quarters of its
total length i.e. B = (3/4)*F. And
the tail is its head plus a quarter the lenght of its body i.e. T = H + B/4. Thus, the equation is
.
F=H+B+T
F = 4 + (3/4)*F + H + B/4
F = 4 + (3/4)*F + 4 + (1/4)*(3/4)*F
F = 8 + (15/16)*F
(1/16)*F = 8
F = 128 inches
Thus, the fish is 128 inches long.
I have holes in my top and bottom, my left and right, and in my middle. But I still hold water.
What am I?
Answer
A Sponge
A Sponge is porous - has holes on all of its sides, but yet it absorbs and holds water.
What are the chances that at least two out of a group of fifty people share the same birthday?
Submitted by : Erin
Answer
The probability of atleast two out of a group of 50 people share the same birthday is 97%
Probability of atleast two share the same birthday = 1 - probability of all 50 have different birthdays
Probability of all 50 have different birthday
= 365/365 * 364/365 * 363/365 * ... * 317/365 * 316/365
= (365 * 364 * 363 * 362 * ... * 317 * 316)/36550
= 0.0296264
Probability of atleast two share the same birthday
= 1 - 0.0296264
= 0.9703735
= 97% approx.
Thus, the probability of atleast two out of a group of 50 people share the same birthday is 97%
This explains why in a school/college with classrooms of 50 students, there are at least two students
with a birthday on
the same day of the year. Also, if there are 23 people in the room, then there are 50% chances that
atleast two of them have
a birthday on the same day of the year!!!
Chintu put some Black marbles and some White marbles into a jar. He then asked his brother
Pintu to take out a marble. Pintu
drew out a Black marble. Chintu asked Pintu to draw out another marble, and again he drew out a
Black marble.
Pintu thought there must be more Black marbles than White marbles in the jar and asked Chintu,
"I wonder what is the probability
of me drawing a Black marble on a third try?"
Chintu replied, "Exactly 9/10 of what it was of drawing a Black marble on your first draw."
Can you help Pintu to determine how many marbles of each colour had been in the jar in the
beginning? Give the minimal possible
answer. Also, Pintu knew that there were at least seven marbles in the jar in the beginning.
.
Answer
There were 8 Black marbles and 4 White marbles in the jar.
Let's assume that initially there are total N marbles. Also, B and W are the number of Black and
White marbles respectively.
Thus, N = B + W
The probability of drawing a Black marble on the first draw = B/(B+W)
Similarly, after drawing 2 Black marbles, the probability of drawing a Black marble on the third
draw = (B-2)/(B+W-2)
Chintu said that the probability of drawing a Black marble on third draw (after drawing Black
marbles on first two draws) is
exactly 9/10 of what it was of drawing a Black marble on first draw.
(B - 2) / (B + W - 2) = (9 / 10) * B / (B + W)
10 * (B + W) * (B - 2) = 9 * B * (B + W - 2)
10B2 - 20B + 10BW - 20W = 9B2 + 9BW - 18B
B2 - 2B + BW - 20W = 0
We know that N = B + W, hence substitute W = N - B
B2 - 2B + B(N - B) - 20(N - B) = 0
B2 - 2B + BN - B2 - 20N + 20B = 0
18B + BN - 20N = 0
B(18 + N) = 20N
B = 20N / (18 + N)
Now, we know that the value of N is at least 7. Hence, using trial-n-error on the equation, the
minimal value of N must be 12 so
that B=8 and W=4.
Hence, initially there were 8 Black marbles and 4 White marbles in the jar.
Pinto says, "The horse is not Black."
Sandy says, "The horse is either Brown or Grey."
Andy says, "The horse is Brown."
At least one is telling truth and at least one is lying.
Can you tell the color of the horse?
Answer
The color of the horse can be any color other than Black and Brown.
If the color of the horse is Black - all are lying.
If the color of the horse is Brown - all are telling truth.
Thus, the horse is neither Black nor Brown.
If the color of the horse is Grey - Pinto and Sandy are telling truth whereas Andy is lying.
If the color of the horse is other than Black, Brown and Grey - Pinto is telling truth whereas Sandy
and Andy are lying.
You must have noticed that for the given conditions, Pinto is always telling truth whereas Andy is
always lying.
A series comprising of alphabets contains 13 letters. The first seven letters in the given series are A,
E, F, H, I, L, M
Can you find the next two letters?
.
Answer
The next letters in the series are N, O, R, S, U, X.
The pattern is - letters whose English names (Phonetic Pronunciations) start with vowels.
Two fathers and two sons go out hunting one day in a huge forest. At the end of the day, only three
people emerge from the forest.
What happened? Note that not a single person is killed/death.
Submitted by : Vertu
Answer
There are only three person entered the forest. Son, Father and Grandfather.
There are two fathers - the father and the grandfather. As grandfather is father's father.
There are also two sons - the son and the father. As the father is the grandfathers son.
If you were to spell out numbers (starting from 1) in English, how far would you have to go until
you would find the letter "A"?
Answer
One Thousand
Tom and Jerry and the boys in the bar were exchanging old war stories.
Tom offered one about how his grandfather led a battalion against a German division during
World War I. Through brilliant
maneuvers, he defeated them and captured valuable territory. After the battle he was awarded a
medal that was inscribed with:
"For Bravery, Daring and Leadership - World War I.
From the Men of Battalion 8."
Jerry looked at Tom and said, "You really don't expect anyone to believe that yarn, do you?"
What's wrong with the story?
Answer
World War I wasn't called "World War I" until World War II.
Arrange five planets such that 4 of them add up to 5th planet numerically. Each of the letters of the
planet should represent a
.
unique number from the range 0 - 9. You have to use all ten digits.
There is an amazing mathematical relationship exists among the names of the planet.
Answer
The tought process is initially to find planets such that the total number of alphabets in them is 10.
The only possible combination of planets is Saturn, Uranus, Venus, Mars and Neptune because
for other combinations there
will be more than 10 alphabets. Among these five, Neptune is the lenghtiest, so it must be the sum
of the other four.
SATURN
URANUS
VENUS
+MARS
--------------
NEPTUNE
Now the only possible value for N is 1. By finding the value for S, we can reach the result:
358691
695163
20163
+4593
--------------
1078610
A woman is about to be executed. Since she has been a good citizen most of her life, the
executioner gives her the option of
chosing by which way she can die, no matter how bizarre, time-consuming, or costly it is.
What manner of death should she choose, or will it not make a difference?
Submitted by : Rachel Kalmin
Answer
She should choose 'an Old Age death' or 'a Natural death'.
"Santa Express" is one kilometer long and always travels at the speed of 60 kilometers per hour.
It passes through a tunnel which is one kilometer long. How long the Express will take to pass
completely through the tunnel?
Answer
.
The express will take total of 2 minutes to pass completely through the tunnel.
The speed of the Santa Express is 60 kms/hr i.e. one km per minute.
The engine of the Express will take one minute to reach from one end to the other end of the
tunnel, as it travels at the speed of
one km per minute and the tunnel is one km long. Thus, after one minute, the Express will be
completely inside the tunnel.
Now it will take another one minute to completely come out of the tunnel. Thus, the express will
take total of 2 minutes to pass
completely through the tunnel.
Vipul was studying for his examinations and the lights went off. It was around 1:00 AM. He lighted
two uniform candles of equal
length but one thicker than the other. The thick candle is supposed to last six hours and the thin
one two hours less. When he
finally went to sleep, the thick candle was twice as long as the thin one.
For how long did Vipul study in candle light?
Answer
Vipul studied for 3 hours in candle light.
Assume that the initial lenght of both the candle was L and Vipul studied for X hours.
In X hours, total thick candle burnt = XL/6
In X hours, total thin candle burnt = XL/4
After X hours, total thick candle remaining = L - XL/6
After X hours, total thin candle remaining = L - XL/4
Also, it is given that the thick candle was twice as long as the thin one when he finally went to sleep.
(L - XL/6) = 2(L - XL/4)
(6 - X)/6 = (4 - X)/2
(6 - X) = 3*(4 - X)
6 - X = 12 - 3X
2X = 6
X=3
Hence, Vipul studied for 3 hours i.e. 180 minutes in candle light.
I bet you Rs. 100 that if you give me Rs. 200, I will give you Rs. 300 in return.
Would you bet with me? Why?
.
Answer
No, you should not bet.
Let's say you bet and you gave Rs. 200 to me. Now there are 2 possibilities.
CASE I - I will give you Rs. 300
If I give you Rs. 300, then I will win Rs. 100 bet. Thus, you have to give me Rs. 100. This is NO
WIN NO LOSE case.
CASE II - I won't give you Rs. 300
If I won't give you Rs. 300, then I will lose Rs. 100 bet. Thus, I have to give you Rs. 100 which I
will give you with smile :-) (of
course, from Rs. 200 you gave me initially) Here, I will make Rs. 100 and you will lose Rs. 100
So the moral - you should not bet !!!
Which number in the series does not fit in the given series:
1 4 3 16 6 36 7 64 9 100
Answer
This is a series with odd positions containing position number whereas even positions containing
square of the position.i.e.
even position numbers are 4 16 36 64 100 and odd position numbers are 1 3 5 7 9
Hence, 6 does not fit in the series. It should be 5.
How do you cut a square cake into 8 equal piece only using 3 straight cuts?
Note that you can not move the pieces as you cut the cake.
Submitted by : Danny Klein
Answer
Cut cake into 4 quarters by 2 vertical cuts which are perpendicular to each other. Now slice the
cake horizontially which makes
total 8 pieces.
Subhash is 14 inches taller than Jatin. The difference between Subhash and Sanjeev is two inches
less than between Sanjeev and
Jatin. Subhash at 6'6" is the tallest.
How tall are Sanjeev and Jatin?
Answer
Sanjeev is 6' and Jatin is 5'4"
It is given that Subhash at 6'6" is the tallest and also he is 14 inches taller than Jatin. It means that
Jatin is 5'4".
Now as the difference between Subhash and Sanjeev is two inches less than between Sanjeev and
Jatin, Sanjeev's height is
more than Jatin's. And that is 6'.
Thus, Sanjeev is 6' and Jatin is 5'4".
.
Thirty white horses on a red hill,
First they champ,
Then they stamp,
Then they stand still.
Answer
Teeth
Thirty white horses are the teeth
A red hill is the gum
First they champ i.e. munch or bite the food
Then they stamp i.e. crush the food
Then they stand still i.e. do nothing as food is eaten
Of the 120 people in the room, 3/5 are women. If 2/3 of the people are married, what is the
maximum number of women in the room
who could be unmarried?
Answer
Maximum 40 women are unmarried.
In the room , there are (3/5)*120 = 72 Women and hence, 48 Men.
Also, married people are (2/3)*120 = 80 which means that 40 people are unmarried.
Even assuming all of the men are married, this still leaves 80 - 48 = 32 others who are married, and
those other are women. So
atleast 32 women must be married, which means that maximum possible number of women who
are unmaried is 72 - 32 = 40
Two trains starting at same time, one from Bangalore to Mysore and other in opposite direction
arrive at their destination 1hr and
4hrs respectively after passing each other.
How much faster is one train from other?
Answer
The speed of Bangalore-Mysore train is TWICE the speed of Mysore-Bangalore train.
Let the distance between Bangalore and Mysore is D kms.
Also, let speed of the train from Bangalore to Mysore is X km/hr and speed of the tain from
Mysore to Bangalore is Y km/hr.
Now, assume that both the trains met each other at T kms from the Bangalore (point P in figure)
Time taken by Bangalore-Mysore train to reach P = Time taken by Mysore-Bangalore train to
reach P
( T / X ) = ( D - T ) / Y -----equ(I)
Also, Bangalore-Mysore train and Mysore-Bangalore train arrive destination 1 hr and 4 hrs
respectively after passing each
.
other. It means that Bangalore-Mysore train travels (D - T) kms in 1 hr at X km/hr and Mysore-
Bangalore train travels T kms in
4 hrs at Y km/hr. Hence,
( D - T ) = X and
T=4*Y
Substituting these values in equation I, we get
(4*Y)/X=X/Y
4*Y*Y=X*X
2*Y=X
Hence, the speed of Bangalore-Mysore train is TWICE the speed of Mysore-Bangalore train.
500 men are arranged in an array of 10 rows and 50 columns according to their heights.
Tallest among each row of all are asked to come out. And the shortest among them is A.
Similarly after resuming them to their original positions, the shortest among each column are
asked to come out. And the tallest
among them is B.
Now who is taller A or B ?
Answer
No one is taller, both are same as A and B are the same person.
As it is mentioned that 500 men are arranged in an array of 10 rows and 50 columns according to
their heights. Let's assume
that position numbers represent their heights. Hence, the shortest among the 50, 100, 150, ... 450,
500 is person with height 50
i.e. A. Similarly the tallest among 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, ..... 48, 48, 50 is person with height 50 i.e. B
Now, both A and B are the person with height 50. Hence both are same.
There is a safe with a 5 digit number as the key. The 4th digit is 4 greater than the second digit,
while the 3rd digit is 3 less than the
2nd digit. The 1st digit is thrice the last digit. There are 3 pairs whose sum is 11.
Find the number.
Answer
65292
As per given conditions, there are three possible combinations for 2nd, 3rd and 4th digits. They
are (3, 0, 7) or (4, 1, 8) or (5, 2,
9)
.
It is given that there are 3 pairs whose sum is 11. All possible pairs are (2, 9), (3, 8), (4, 7), (5, 6).
Now required number is 5
digit number and it contains 3 pairs of 11. So it must not be having 0 and 1 in it. Hence, the only
possible combination for 2nd,
3rd and 4th digits is (5, 2, 9)
Also, 1st digit is thrice the last digit. The possible combinations are (3, 1), (6, 2) and (9, 3), out of
which only (6, 2) with (5, 2, 9)
gives 3 pairs of 11. Hence, the answer is 65292.
What letter comes next in the series:
O, T, T, F, F, S, S, E, N, _?
Answer
T
The letters are the first letters of the numbers starting at One and they stand for the first ten
numbers i.e. One, Two, Three,
Four, Five, Six, Seven, Eight, Nine, Ten
A man walked one mile south. Then he walked one mile east. Then he walked one mile north.
He realized he was exactly where he
started. Just then, he was attacked by a bear.
What color was the bear?
Answer
White - a polar bear.
The man travels one mile south(down), one mile east(right), and one mile north(up) - a square
with the top side missing is
made. If he ended where he started, the shape has to form a triangle. The only place on earth that
can have three equal
distances travelled, each at a nintey degree angle, is if you start at the north pole. And only polar
bears live that far north, so
the bear is white.
We have to fill number from 1 to 12 at the intersection point of two or more lines. We have to
construct a star using
two triangle. The sum of all number lying in straight lines should be same. This can be easilty
understood by the fig.
and hence solved.
Submitted by : Vaibhav Gupta
Answer
We have one answer where sum of all the numbers lying in straight lines is 26.
If you have others, do submit them.
.
If one person sends the e-mail to two friends, asking each of them to copy the mail and send it to
two of their friends, those in turn
send it to two of their friends and so on.
How many e-mails would have been sent by the time it did 30 sets?
Answer
2147483646
First person sent the mail to 2 persons. Those 2 sent the mail to 2 persons each, total 4 persons.
Now, those 4 person sent
mail to total 8 persons, then 8 to 16 persons, 16 to 32 persons and so on.... Hence, it a series of 2,
4, 8, 16, 32 upto 30
numbers
It is a Geometric series with common ratio 2 and first number is also 2. Summation of such series
is given by A * (Rn - 1) / (R -
1) where
A = First term
R = Common Ratio
n = total numbers
So total number of times mail sent by the time it did 30 sets
= 2 * (230 - 1) / (2 - 1)
= 2 * (1073741824 - 1)
= 2 * 1073741823
= 2147483646
A camp-fire was attended by 49 friends. After shaking hands, each of them sat on the round table
and clinked their mug with the
friends to his immediate left and immediate right.
How many times did the mugs clink?
Answer
49 times
Let's assume that everyone clinked their mug with friend to his left only. It means that there are
total 49 clinks. Now the right
clink of each person is left clink of the person on right which is already happened. Hence, there
are only 49 clinks.
Veeru says to Jay, "Can you figure out how many Eggs I have in my bucket?" He gives 3 clues to
Jay: If the number of Eggs I have
1. is a multiple of 5, it is a number between 1 and 19
2. is not a multiple of 8, it is a number between 20 and 29
3. is not a multiple of 10, it is a number between 30 and 39
How many Eggs does Veeru have in his bucket?
Answer
32 eggs
Let's apply all 3 condition separately and put all possible numbers together.
.
First condition says that if multiple of 5, then the number is between 1 and 19. Hence, the possible
numbers are (5, 10, 15, 21,
22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39)
Second condition says that if not a multiple of 8, then the number is between 20 and 29. Hence,
the possible numbers are (8,
16, 20, 21, 22, 23, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 32)
Third condition says that if not a multiple of 10, then the number is between 30 and 39. Hence,
the possible numbers are (10,
20, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39)
Only number 32 is there in all 3 result sets. That means that only number 32 satisfies all three
conditions. Hence, Veeru have
32 eggs in his bucket.
There are 70 employees working with BrainVista of which 30 are females. Also,
30 employees are married
24 employees are above 25 years of age
19 married employees are above 25 years, of which 7 are males
12 males are above 25 years of age
15 males are married.
How many unmarried females are there and how many of them are above 25?
Answer
15 unmarried females & none are above 25 years of age.
Simply put all given information into the table structure and you will get the answer.
Married Unmarried
Below 25 Above 25 Below 25 Above 25
Female 3 12 15 0
Male 8 7 20 5
Once a week a wagon driver leaves his hut and drives his wagon to the river dock to pick up
supplies for his town. At 4:05 PM, onefifth
of the way to the dock, he passes the Temple. At 4:15 PM, one-third of the way, he passes the
Preetam-Da-Dhabaa.
At what time does he reached the dock?
Answer
5:05 PM
At 4:05 PM, the wagon driver passes the temple, one-fifth of the way to the dock. Also, at 4:15
PM, he passes the Preetam-Da-
Dhabaa, one-third of the way. Thus, he travels 2/15 (1/3 - 1/5) of the distance in 10 minutes.
At 4:15 PM, he has already travelled 1/3 of the distance. Thus 2/3 of the way is remaining, which
can be travelled in
= ( (2/3) * 10 ) / (2/15)
= 50 minutes
At 4:15, he was at Preetam-Da-Dhabaa.and remaining way will take 50 more minutes. Hence, the
driver will reach at 5:05 PM
to the dock.
.
Raj has a jewel chest containing Rings, Pins and Ear-rings. The chest contains 26 pieces. Raj has 2
1/2 times as many rings as
pins, and the number of pairs of earrings is 4 less than the number of rings.
How many earrings does Raj have?
Answer
12 earrings
Assume that there are R rings, P pins and E pair of ear-rings.
It is given that, he has 2 1/2 times as many rings as pins.
R = (5/2) * P or P = (2*R)/5
And, the number of pairs of earrings is 4 less than the number of rings.
E = R - 4 or R = E + 4
Also, there are total 26 pieces.
R + P + 2*E = 26
R + (2*R)/5 + 2*E = 26
5*R + 2*R + 10*E = 130
7*R + 10*E = 130
7*(E + 4) + 10*E = 130
7*E + 28 + 10*E = 130
17*E = 102
E=6
Hence, there are 6 pairs of Ear-rings i.e. total 12 Ear-rings
An apple vendor has 1000 apples and 10 empty boxes. He asks his son to place all the 1000
apples in all the 10 boxes in such a
manner that if he asks for any number of apples from 1 to 1000, his son should be able to pick
them in terms of boxes.
How did the son place all the apples among the 10 boxes, given that any number of apples can be
put in one box.
Answer
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 489
Let's start from scratch.
The apple vandor can ask for only 1 apple, so one box must contain 1 apple.
He can ask for 2 apples, so one box must contain 2 apples.
He can ask for 3 apples, in that case box one and box two will add up to 3.
He can ask for 4 apples, so one box i.e. third box must contain 4 apples.
Now using box number one, two and three containing 1, 2 and 4 apples respectively, his son can
give upto 7 apples.
Hence, forth box must contain 8 apples.
Similarly, using first four boxes containing 1, 2, 4 and 8 apples, his son can give upto 15 apples.
Hence fifth box must
contain 16 apples.
You must have noticed one thing till now that each box till now contains power of 2 apples.
Hence the answer is 1, 2,
4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 489. This is true for any number of apples, here in our case only upto
1000.
.
Weight in my belly,
Trees on my back,
Nails in my ribs,
Feet I do lack.
Who or what am I?
Submitted by : Dave
Answer
A Ship or a Boat
The Cargo is the weight in his belly.
Trees on his back are the Planks used.
Nails are used to fix the planks together.
Ship/Boat do not have feet.
Do you know the missing number in the given series?
10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 20, 22, 24, ___ , 100, 121, 10000
Answer
The missing number is 31.
The pattern is - Sixteen in the base n for n = 16, 15, ..., 2.
16 in the base 16 = 10
16 in the base 2 = 10000
Thus, the complete series is - 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 20, 22, 24, 31, 100, 121, 10000
It cannot be seen, cannot be felt
Cannot be heard, cannot be smelt
It lies behind stars and under hills
And empty holes it fills
It comes first and follows after
Ends life, kills laughter.
Answer
.
The darkness (The dark)
The darkness cannot be seen, cannot be felt, cannot be heard, cannot be smelt. There is darkness
behind stars and under
hills. Also, there is darkness in empty holes.
Which is correct:
A> The Second Millennium began on Jan 1, 2000
B> The Second Millennium will begin on Jan 1, 2001
Answer
Neither is correct.
The second millennium began January 1, 1001.
A tank can be filled by pipe A in 30 minutes and by pipe B in 24 minutes. Outlet pipe C can
empty the full tank in one hour and
twenty minutes.
If the tank is empty initially and if all the three pipes A, B and C are opened simultaneously, in
how much time will the tank be full?
Answer
The tank will be full in 16 minutes.
In one minute,
pipe A can fill 1/30 part of the tank.
pipe B can fill 1/24 part of the tank.
pipe C can empty 1/80 part of the tank.
Thus, the net water level in one minute is
= 1/30 + 1/24 - 1/80
= 15/240 part of the tank
Hence, the tank will be full in 240/15 i.e. 16 minutes.
A tank can be filled by pipe A in 30 minutes and by pipe B in 24 minutes. Outlet pipe C can
empty the full tank in X minutes.
If the tank is empty initially and if all the three pipes A, B and C are opened simultaneously, the
tank will NEVER be full. Give the
maximal possible value of X.
Answer
The maximum possible value of X is 13 minutes 20 seconds.
In one minute,
pipe A can fill 1/30 part of the tank.
pipe B can fill 1/24 part of the tank.
Thus, the net water level increase in one minute is
= 1/30 + 1/24
.
= 3/40 part of the tank
In order to keep the tank always empty, outlet pipe C should empty at least 3/40 part of the tank in
one minute. Thus, pipe C
can empty the full tank in 40/3 i.e. 13 minutes 20 seconds.
If today is Wednesday, what is one day before the day, after the day, three days after the day
before yesterday?
Submitted by : Jennifer Renick
Answer
Thursday
Start backwards.
Today is Wednesday.
The day before yesterday is Monday.
Three days after Monday is Thursday.
The day after Thursday is Friday
The day before Friday is Thursday.
Also, note that the first two conditions cancel each other out as one day before the day, one day
after the day is the same day.
Hence, it can be reduced to "three days after the day before yesterday".
There are 10 cups placed on a table such that 3 are face up and 7 are bottom up. A move is
defined as inverting a pair
(compulsorily) of cups.
What is the minimum number of moves required to make all the cups face the same way?
Answer
It is not at all possible. There is no way that one can do that with given Move.
A move is defined as inverting a pair of cups, compulsorily. Also, there are odd number of cups
face up (3)and odd number of
cups bottom up (7). Now whenever you make a move you have to invert 2 cups compulsorily.
Hence, always odd number of
cups will be face up and bottom up, whatever move you make.
A man went downstairs to get a drink. He turned of the tap and the lights and went to bed. When
he woke up in the middle of the
night he saw thousands of people dead, so he jumped out the window and killed himself.
Why did he kill himself?
Submitted by : Jennifer
Answer
He lived in the light-house. When he turned out the light, he turned out the light-house light that
tells ships where the land is! So
some ships must have crashed into the shore and killed people that were there on the ship.
When the man woke up in the middle of the night, he saw thousands of people dead. He realised
his mistake and was so sad
and upset that he jumped out the window and killed himself.
.
Kate, Demi, Madona, Sharon, Britney and Nicole decided to lunch together in a restaurant. The
waiter led them to a round table
with six chairs.
How many different ways can they seat?
Answer
There are 120 different possible seating arrangments.
Note that on a round table ABCDEF and BCDEFA is the same.
The first person can sit on any one of the seats. Now, for the second person there are 5 options,
for the third person there are 4
options, for the forth person there are 3 options, for the fifth person there are 2 options and for
the last person there is just one
option.
Thus, total different possible seating arrangements are
=5*4*3*2*1
= 120
Sam and Mala have a conversation.
Sam says I am certainly not over 40
Mala says I am 38 and you are atleast 5 years older than me
Now Sam says you are atleast 39
All the statements by the two are false. How old are they really?
Answer
Sam is 41 and Mala is 37.
Let's invert the teaser and read it like this :
Sam says I am certainly over 40
Mala says I am not 38 and you are atmost 4 years older than me
Now Sam says you are atmost 38
From first statement it is clear that Sam is over 40. Also, from next 2 statements it is clear that Mala
is less then 38. Hence the
possibilities are :
Sam = 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, ......
Mala = 37, 36, 35, 34, 33, ......
It also says that the difference between their age is maximum 4 years. Hence, there is only one
possible pair i.e. 41 and 37, all
other combination have differences more then 4.
Hence the answer - Sam is 41 and Mala is 37.
Jim lies a lot. He tells the truth on only one day in a week.
One day he said: "I lie on Mondays and Tuesdays."
The next day he said: "Today is either Sunday, Saturday or Thursday."
The next day he said: "I lie on Fridays and Wednesdays."
.
On which day of the week does Jim tell the truth?
Answer
Jim tells the truth on Tuesday.
As Jim tells truth only on one day in a week, his statement on day 1 and day 3 both can not be
false. Otherwise he tells truth on
more than one days in a week. Also, all three statements are mad on three consecutive days,
statement made on day 1 and
day 3 both can not be true. Thus, either the statement made on day 1 or day 3 is true and other is
false. Also, the statement
made on day 2 must be false i.e. day 1 is not Saturday, Friday or Wednesday.
Let's assume that the statement 1 is true. Then from the statement 3, day 1 must be either Friday
or Wednesday. But it is
already deduced that day 1 is not Saturday, Friday or Wednesday.
Hence, the statement made on day 1 is false and the last statement is true. then from the statement
1, day 3 must be either
Monday or Tuesday. But it is already deduced that day 1 can not be Saturday i.e. day 3 can't be
Monday. Hence, Jim tells the
truth on Tuesday.
An orange colored glass has Orange juice and white colored glass has Apple juice both of equal
volumes. 50ml of the orange juice
is taken and poured into the white glass. After that similarly, 50ml from the white glass is poured
into the orange glass.
Of the two quantities, the amount of apple juice in the orange glass and the amount of orange juice
in the white glass, which one is
greater and by how much?
Answer
The two quantities are equal.
Solve it by taking example. Let's assume that both glasses contain 450 ml of juice each.
Now, 50ml of the orange juice is taken and poured into the White glass. Hence, orange colored
glass contains 400 ml of
Orange juice and white glass contains 450 ml of Apple juice and 50 ml of Orange juice i.e. total of
500 ml from white glass
contains 450 ml of Apple juice and 50 ml of Orange juice. It means that every 50 ml from white
glass contains 45 ml of
Apple juice and 5 ml of Orange juice.
Similary, 50 ml of juice from white glass is poured into orange glass. Now this 50 ml is not a pure
apple juice. It contains 45 ml
of Apple juice and 5 ml of Orange juice.
Hence, Orange glass contains 405 ml of Orange juice and 45 ml of Apple juice. Similary, white
glass contains 405 ml of Apple
juice and 45 ml of Orange juice.
Orange Glass White Glass
Orange Juice Apple Juice Orange Juice Apple Juice
Initially 450 ml 0 ml 0 ml 450 ml
50 ml from Orange Glass is poured into White Glass 400 ml 0 ml 50 ml 450 ml
50 ml from White Glass is poured into Orange Glass 405 ml 45 ml 45 ml 405 ml
Now it is clear that the amount of apple juice in the orange glass and the amount of orange juice in
the white glass are the
same.
P.S. Here we assumed 450 ml as initial quantity in both the glasses just for simplicity. You can try
the same by assuming any
other number. But the answer is the same.
.
When Socrates was imprisoned for being a disturbing influence, he was held in high esteem by his
guards. All four of them hoped
that something would occur that would facilitate his escape. One evening, the guard who was on
duty intentionally left the cell door
open so that Socrates could leave for distant parts.
Socrates did not attempt to escape, as it was his philosophy that if you accept society's rules, you
must also accept it's
punishments. However, the open door was considered by the authorities to be a serious matter. It
was not clear which guard was
on that evening. The four guards make the following statements in their defense:
Aaron:
A) I did not leave the door open.
B) Clement was the one who did it.
Bob:
A) I was not the one who was on duty that evening.
B) Aaron was on duty.
Clement:
A) Bob was the one on duty that evening.
B) I hoped Socrates would escape.
David:
A) I did not leave the door open.
B) I was not surprised that Socrates did not attempt to escape.
Considering that, in total, three statements are true, and five statements are false, which guard is
guilty?
Answer
David is the guilty.
Note that "All four of them hoped that something would occur that would facilitate his escape". It
makes Clement's statement B
True and David's statement B False.
Now consider each of them as a guilty, one at a time.
Aaron Bob Clement David
ABABABAB
True
Stmts
If Aaron is guilty False False True True False True True False 4
If Bob is guilty True False False False True True True False 4
If Clement is guilty True True True False False True True False 5
If David is guilty True False True False False True False False 3
Since in total, three statements are true and five statements are false. It is clear from the above
table that David is the guity.
Jim lies a lot. He tells the truth on only one day in a week.
One day he said: "I lie on Mondays and Tuesdays."
The next day he said: "Today is either Sunday, Saturday or Thursday."
The next day he said: "I lie on Fridays and Wednesdays."
On which day of the week does Jim tell the truth?
Answer
Jim tells the truth on Tuesday.
.
As Jim tells truth only on one day in a week, his statement on day 1 and day 3 both can not be
false. Otherwise he tells truth on
more than one days in a week. Also, all three statements are mad on three consecutive days,
statement made on day 1 and
day 3 both can not be true. Thus, either the statement made on day 1 or day 3 is true and other is
false. Also, the statement
made on day 2 must be false i.e. day 1 is not Saturday, Friday or Wednesday.
Let's assume that the statement 1 is true. Then from the statement 3, day 1 must be either Friday
or Wednesday. But it is
already deduced that day 1 is not Saturday, Friday or Wednesday.
Hence, the statement made on day 1 is false and the last statement is true. then from the statement
1, day 3 must be either
Monday or Tuesday. But it is already deduced that day 1 can not be Saturday i.e. day 3 can't be
Monday. Hence, Jim tells the
truth on Tuesday.
An electric train is going south but the wind is blowing westward.
Which direction will the smoke from the train be blowing?
Submitted by : Hannah Brooks
Answer
It is an Electric Train. And Electric trains do not produce any smoke. Therefore there is no smoke
to be blown.
Consider a chessboard with a single Rook. A Rook can move any number of square
sideways/forward, but not diagonally.
What is the minimum number of moves the Rook needs to make, in order to pass over all the
squares on the chessboard and
return to the original position?
Note: Take any square as a starting position for the Rook.
Answer
16 moves
As a Rook can move any number of square sideways/forward, but not diagonally and there are 8
rows and 8 columns on the
chessboard; the Rook needs minimum 16 moves to pass over all the squares and return to the
original position.
Mrs. Kovarik made twenty four Sandwiches. All but seven were eaten.
How many were left?
Submitted by : Kimi
Answer
A Simple one.
It says "all but seven were eaten". Hence, Seven Sandwiches were left.
.
Without introducing + signs, arrange six "9" in such a way that they add up to 100.
Answer
(999-99)/9 = 900/9 = 100
(99 - (-9/9)) * 9/9 = (99 - (-1)) * 1 = 100
99 99/99
A bus driver was going down a street. He was on the wrong side. He went at a stop sign and didn't
signal at a turn. He went under
the minimum speed and yet he didn't get in trouble for his actions.
WHY not?
Submitted by : Kimi
Answer
He was Walking. He is a Bus driver. But it does not say that he was driving.
Mrs. Watsherface had a garage sale. A custmer named Gina bought an old lamp and a rug. She
paid a total of $5.25 for
everything. The rug cost 25 cents more than the lamp.
How much did each cost?
Submitted by : Kimi
Answer
The lamp cost $ 2.50 and the rug cost $ 2.75
A simple one.
Assume that the lamp cost $ L.
Hence the rug must have cost $ (L + 0.25)
Also, total cost is $ 5.25, Hence the equation :
L + L + 0.25 = 5.25
2*L=5
L = 2.50
Hence, the lamp cost $ 2.50 and the rug cost $ 2.75
For many years a BIG company was looking for the universial solvent - a solvent that will dissolve
anything.
One day a man walked in a bottle in his hand. The man said "I've come up with the UNIVERSAL
solvent!! And if you're lucky, i will
sell it to you for a mere $100,000!"
The president looked seriously at the man and screamed, "Get out of here you stupid creep!
You're a dumb liar and a fake!!!"
And with that the president of this huge company picked up the guy and threw him out by his feet.
.
How did the president know the man was a fake before he even tested the solvent?
Submitted by : Kimi
Answer
The UNIVERSAL solvent is a solvent that will dissolve anything. The man came with Universal
solvent in a bottle. Whereas
according to definition of Universal Solvent even bottle should dissolve in it; but it was not. So the
President came to know that
he was a FAKE.
Also, if there was a Universal Solvent then it would dissolve anything and everything. Isn't that
interesting?
A sheet of paper has statements numbered from 1 to 100. Statement N says "Exactly N of the
statements on this sheet are false."
How many statements are true?
Answer
Only One statement is true - Statement 99
If they are all false, statement 100 would be true i.e. "Exactly 100 of the statements on this sheet are
false", which is
contradictory.
If total of 99 statements are false, statement 99 would be true i.e. "Exactly 99 of the statements on
this sheet are false". That's
the answer - total 99 statements are false, and statement 99 is true.
Try out for all remaining statements, they all will contradict itself.
What two numbers comes next in this series?:
1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 30, 31, ? ?
Answer
Next two numbers are 62 and 63.
The pattern is double the number, add one, double the number, add one...
Starting with 1, for next number double the number = 2
For next number add one = 3
Again, double the number = 6
Next add one = 7 and so on ...
Now at 31, for next number double the number = 62
Add one for next number = 63
There is a one floor house, and everything in it is blue, green or purple. The people are purple,
the carpeting is green and the walls
are blue.
What colour do you suppose the stairs are?
.
Answer
It is a one floor house and one floor house do not have stairs. Hence, there is no question of
colour of stairs as there are no
stairs. 0;-)
A man is looking at a picture, in his mother's, only brother's, nephew's house.
Someone walks by this man and asks "Who are you looking at?". The man answered "I am looking
at my daughter's,only brother's,
mother's, father's son-in-law's,son's, father's picture. Also, neither I nor my wife have brothers or
sisters."
Whose house is the man in and who is he looking at?
Answer
Man's mothers only brother's nephew is the man himself as man do not have any brothers or
sisters. Thus, he is in his house.
Man's daughter's only brother = his son
Son's mother = his wife
Wife's father's son-in-law = man himself (as his wife do not have any brothers or sisters)
Again, man's son's father is himself.
Hence, the man is in his own house and looking at his own picture !!!
Consider a number 235, where last digit is the sum of first two digits i.e. 2 + 3 = 5.
How many such 3-digit numbers are there?
Answer
There are 45 different 3-digit numbers.
The last digit can not be 0.
If the last digit is 1, the only possible number is 101. (Note that 011 is not a 3-digit number)
If the last digit is 2, the possible numbers are 202 and 112.
If the last digit is 3, the possible numbers are 303, 213 and 123.
If the last digit is 4, the possible numbers are 404, 314, 224 and 134.
If the last digit is 5, the possible numbers are 505, 415, 325, 235 and 145.
Note the pattern here - If the last digit is 1, there is only one number. If the last digit is 2, there are
two numbers. If the last digit
is 3, there are three numbers. If the last digit is 4, there are four numbers. If the last digit is 5, there
are five numbers. And so
on.....
Thus, total numbers are
1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 6 + 7 + 8 + 9 = 45
Altogether then, there are 45 different 3-digit numbers, where last digit is the sum of first two digits.
.
Imagine a triangle of coins on a table so that the first row has one coin in it and the second row has
two coins in it and so on. If you
can only move one coin at a time, how many moves does it take to make the triangle point the
other way?
For a triangle with two row it is one, for a triangle with three rows it is two, for a triangle with four
rows it is three.
For a traingle with five rows is it four?
Submitted by : Alex Crosse
Answer
It takes 5 moves to make the triangle with 5 rows point the other way.
0 = a coin that has not been moved.
X = the old position of the moved coin
8 = the new position of the moved coin.
________X
_______X X
____8 0 0 0 8
_____0 0 0 0
____X 0 0 0 X
_______8 8
________8
For traingle of any number of rows, the optimal number of moves can be achieved by moving the
vertically symmetrical coins
i.e. by moving same number of coins from bottom left and right, and remaining coins from the
top.
For a triangle with an odd number of rows, the total moves require are :
(N2/4) - (N-4) Where N = 4, 6, 8, 10, ...
For a triangle with even number of rows, the total moves require are :
((N2-1)/4) - (N-4) Where N = 5, 7, 9, 11, ...
Thanks to Alex Crosse for submitting above formulas.
My brother is a bus driver. Two days ago he drove a bus full of people. At the end of the route the
bus was empty but not a single
person had gotton off.
How is this possible?
Submitted by : JD
Answer
Not a single person had gotton off because all of them were either married or widowed or
divorced. Not a single of them
was SINGLE i.e no bachelors, all married ;))
Ben can never tell a lie, George can never tell the truth.
One of them said, "The other one said he was George".
Who said that?
Submitted by : Zachary MOrrison
.
Answer
The speaker is George.
Since Ben cann't lie, he cann't say that he is George. Similarly, since George cann't tell the truth, he
too cann't say that he is
George. Thus, none of them can say that he is George. It means that the speaker is lying. Hence,
the speaker must be George.
He got it in the woods and brought it home in his hand because he couldn't find it. The more he
looked for it, the more he felt it.
When he finally found it, he threw it away.
What it is?
Answer
A Thorn
He got a thorn in his hand when he went to the forest. But he couldn't find it, hence he came
home with it in his hand. The more
he looked for it, the more pain he felt. Finally, when he found it, obviously he threw it away.
There is a shortage of tubelights, bulbs and fans in a village - Kharghar. It is found that
All houses do not have either tubelight or bulb or fan.
exactly 19% of houses do not have just one of these.
atleast 67% of houses do not have tubelights.
atleast 83% of houses do not have bulbs.
atleast 73% of houses do not have fans.
What percentage of houses do not have tubelight, bulb and fan?
Answer
42% houses do not have tubelight, bulb and fan.
Let's assume that there are 100 houses. Hence, there should be total 300 items i.e. 100 tubelights,
100 bulbs and 100 fans.
From the given data, we know that there is shortage of atleast (67+83+73) 223 items in every 100
houses.
Also, exactly 19 houses do not have just one item. It means that remaining 81 houses should
account for the shortage of
remaining (223-19) 204 items. If those remaining 81 houses do not have 2 items each, there would
be a shortage of 162 items.
But total of 204 items are short. Hence, atleast (204-162) 42 houses do not have all 3 items -
tubelight, bulb and fan.
Thus, 42% houses do not have tubelight, bulb and fan.
A boy found that he had a 48 inch strip of paper. He could cut an inch off every second.
How long would it take for him to cut 48 pieces? He can not fold the strip and also, can not stack
two or more strips and cut them
together.
Submitted by : Kimi
.
Answer
47 seconds.
To get 48 pieces, the boy have to put only 47 cuts. i.e. he can cut 46 pieces in 46 seconds. After
getting 46 pieces, he will have
a 2 inches long piece. He can cut it into two with just a one cut in 1 second. Hence, total of 47
seconds.
Some will use me, while others will not.
Some have remembered, while others have forgot.
For profit or gain, I'm used expertly.
I can't be picked off the ground or tossed into the sea.
Only gained from patience and time, can you unravel my rhyme?
Answer
Knowledge
The other possible answers are Experience and Wisdom.
You live in a hilly section of the suburbs and want to buy a new set of table and chairs for the
garden. Would you be better off
buying items of furniture that have four legs or three legs? And why?
Answer
A table and chairs with three legs.
Remember you live in a hilly section and also you require furniture for the garden. A table/chair
with three legs is more stable,
as three points always lie in a plane.
This is an unusual paragraph. I'm curious how quickly you can find out what is so unusual about it.
It looks so plain you would think
nothing was wrong with it. In fact, nothing is wrong with it! It is unusual though. Study it, and think
about it, but you still may not find
anything odd. But if you work at it a bit, you might find out.
Submitted by : Helen Normandin
Answer
There is no letter "E" in the paragraph.
Letter "E" is the most commonly used letter in English language. Hence, its really unusual that
there is not a single "E" in that
paragraph.
Few years ago, a Law teacher came across a student who was willing to learn but was unable to pay
the fee. The student struck a
deal saying, "I would pay your fee the day I win my first case in the court". Teacher agreed and
proceeded with the law course.
.
When the course was finished and teacher started pestering the student to pay up the fee, student
reminded the deal and pushed
days. Fed up with this, the teacher decided to sue the student in the court of law and both of them
decided to argue for themselves.
Did the teacher make the right decision? Will he get his fee from the student?
Answer
This is one of the greatest paradoxes ever recorded in history.
The teacher can put forward his argument saying: "If I win this case, as per the court of law, student
has to pay me. And if I lose
the case, student will still pay me because he would have won his first case. So either way i will have
to get the money".
Equally student can argued back saying: "If I win the case, as per the court of law, I don't have to
pay anything to the teacher.
And if I lose the case, I don't have to pay him because I haven't won my first case yet. So either
way, I am not going to pay the
teacher anything".
So once again stuck into Paradox !!!
There is a 50m long army platoon marching ahead. The last person in the platoon wants to give a
letter to the first person leading
the platoon. So while the platoon is marching he runs ahead, reaches the first person and hands
over the letter to him and without
stopping he runs and comes back to his original position.
In the mean time the whole platoon has moved ahead by 50m.
The question is how much distance did the last person cover in that time. Assuming that he ran the
whole distance with uniform
speed.
Submitted by : manojaba
Answer
The last person covered 120.71 meters.
It is given that the platoon and the last person moved with uniform speed. Also, they both moved
for the identical amount of
time. Hence, the ratio of the distance they covered - while person moving forward and backword -
are equal.
Let's assume that when the last person reached the first person, the platoon moved X meters
forward.
Thus, while moving forward the last person moved (50+X) meters whereas the platoon moved X
meters.
Similarly, while moving back the last person moved [50-(50-X)] X meters whereas the platoon
moved (50-X) meters.
Now, as the ratios are equal,
(50+X)/X = X/(50-X)
(50+X)*(50-X) = X*X
Solving, X=35.355 meters
Thus, total distance covered by the last person
= (50+X) + X
= 2*X + 50
= 2*(35.355) + 50
= 120.71 meters
Note that at first glance, one might think that the total distance covered by the last person is 100
meters, as he ran the total
lenght of the platoon (50 meters) twice. TRUE, but that's the relative distance covered by the last
person i.e. assuming that the
platoon is stationary.
The word has the first two letters meaning male.
The first three letters meaning female.
The first four letters meaning male.
And the whole word meaning female.
.
What is the word?
Submitted by : Brittany
Answer
The answer is HEROINE.
The first two letters HE - male.
The first three letters HER - female.
The first four letters HERO - male.
The whole word HEROINE - female.
A man received a cheque. The rupees has been transposed for paise and vice versa. After
spending 5 rupees 42 paise, he
discovered that he now had exactly six times the value of the correct cheque amount.
What amount should he have received?
Answer
He received 6 rupees and 44 paise.
Let's assume that he received a cheque of X rupees and Y paise i.e. (100X + Y)
The amount received by him = 100Y + X
After spending 5 rupees 42 paise, the remaining amount is (100Y + X - 542) which is 6 times the
original amount. Thus,
(100Y + X - 542) = 6*(100X + Y)
100Y + X - 542 = 600X + 6Y
94Y = 599X + 542
Using trial-n-error, we get X=6 and Y=44
Hence, he should have received 6 rupees and 44 paise.
SkyFi city is served by 6 subway lines - A, E, I, O, U and Z.
When it snows, morning service on line E is delayed.
When it rains or snows, service on the lines A, U and Z is delayed both morning and afternoon.
When the temperature drops below 20 C, afternoon service is cancelled on either line A or line
O, but not both.
When the temperature rises above 40 C, afternoon service is cancelled on either line I or line Z,
but not both.
When service on line A is delayed or cancelled, service on line I is also delayed.
When service on line Z is delayed or cancelled, service on line E is also delayed.
On February 10, it snows all day with the temperature at 18C. On how many lines service will be
delayed or cancelled, including
both morning and afternoon?
Answer
The service will be delayed or cancelled on 5 lines - A, E, I, U and Z except line O.
Go through each statement and cross the subway line with delayed or cancelled service.
It is given that it snows all day with the temperature at 18C.
From (1), line E is delayed.
.
From (2), line A, U and Z are delayed.
From (3), either line A or line O is cancelled.
From (5), line I is delayed because of line A delay.
From (6), line E is delayed because of line Z delay.
As service on line A is delayed, service on line O can not be. Hence, service will be delayed or
cancelled on 5 lines - A, E, I, U
and Z except line O.
One of the four people - Mr. Clinton, his wife Monika, their son Mandy and their daughter Cindy
- is a singer and another is a
dancer. Mr. Clinton is older than his wife and Mady is older than his sister.
1. If the singer and the dancer are the same sex, then the dancer is older than the singer.
2. If neither the singer nor the dancer is the parent of the other, then the singer is older than the
dancer.
3. If the singer is a man, then the singer and the dancer are the same age.
4. If the singer and the dancer are of opposite sex then the man is older than the woman.
5. If the dancer is a woman, then the dancer is older than the singer.
Whose occupation do you know? And what is his/her occupation?
Answer
Cindy is the Singer. Mr. Clinton or Monika is the Dancer.
From (1) and (3), the singer and the dancer, both can not be a man. From (3) and (4), if the singer
is a man, then the dancer
must be a man. Hence, the singer must be a woman.
CASE I : Singer is a woman and Dancer is also a woman
Then, the dancer is Monika and the singer is Cindy.
CASE II : Singer is a woman and Dancer is also a man
Then, the dancer is Mr. Clinton and the singer is Cindy.
In both the cases, we know that Cindy is the Singer. And either Mr. Clinton or Monika is the
Dancer.
Find next two numbers in the series:
60, 30, 20, 15, ?, ?
Answer
12 and 10
The pattern is 60 divide by the position of the number.
The first number is 60/1 = 60
The second number is 60/2 = 30
The third number is 60/3 = 20
The fourth number is 60/4 = 15
The fifth number is 60/5 = 12
The sixth number is 60/6 = 10
Hence the next two numbers in the series are 12 and 10.
.
Find the next two numbers in the given series.
0 2 3 4 5 5 7 6 6 7 11 7 13 9 8 8 17 8 19 9 10 13 23 ? ?
Answer
The pattern is - sum of factors in prime factorization of positive integers starting with 1. Note that 1
is not a Prime number.
Integer Prime Factorization Sum
1-0
222
333
4 2*2 4
555
6 2*3 5
777
8 2*2*2 6
9 3*3 6
10 2*5 7
11 11 11
12 2*2*3 7
13 13 13
14 2*7 9
15 3*5 8
16 2*2*2*2 8
17 17 17
18 2*3*3 8
19 19 19
20 2*2*5 9
21 3*7 10
22 2*11 13
23 23 23
24 2*2*2*3 9
25 5*5 10
Hence, the next numbers in the series are 9 10 15 9 11 29 10 31 10 14 19 12 10 37 21 16 11 41 12
43 15 11 25 47 11 14 12
.....
If A+B=C, D-C=A and E-B=C, then what does D+F stands for? Provide your answer in letter
terms as well as in number terms.
Submitted by : David
.
Answer
J or 10
A simple one.
Assume that each character represents the number equivalent to the position in the alphabet i.e. A
= 1, B = 2, C = 3, D = 4 and
so on. Now let's check our assumption.
A + B = C i.e. 1 + 2 = 3
D - C = A i.e. 4 - 3 = 1
E - B = C i.e. 5 - 2 = 3
Thus, our assumption was Correct. Hence, D + F = J i.e. 4 + 6 = 10
Three convicts are brought into the warden's office. He says he can parole one of them and to
decide which one he will parole he
takes out 5 hats (3 red and 2 white). He stands behind them and places a hat on each one of their
heads and puts the other two
remaining hats in a drawer.
He tells the prisioners they can look at the others hats and if they can tell which hat they have on
they will be the one who is
paroled.
The first man looks at the other two and says, "I don't know."
The second man looks at the others hats and says, "I don't know."
The third man who is blind says, "Even though I have not the gift of sight I can tell by what the
others have said that the color of my
hat is..."
What color is the blind mans hat and how does he know?
Submitted by : Anne Hanna
Answer
The color of blind man's hat is Red.
It is sure that the first man saw either both Red hats or one White hat and one Red hat. There are
6 such possibilities:
1) R R R
2) R R W
3) R W R
4) W R R
5) W R W
6) W W R
In all above possibilities, the first man won't be sure of the color of his hat.
Now, the second man knows that the first man saw either both Red hats or one White hat and one
Red hat. And, he also knows
that its one of the above 6 possibilities. (like we know ;)) But he says, "I don't know". That means
that (2) and (5) are not the
possibilities as in either case he would be sure of the color of his hat (Red) by just looking at the
third man's color of hat
(White).
Now, the blind man knows that there are just 4 possibilities - (1), (3), (4), (6) - and in all, the color
of his hat is Red.
If three babies are born every second of the day, then how many babies will be born in the year
2001?
.
Answer
9,46,08,000 babies
The total seconds in year 2001
= 365 days/year * 24 hours/day * 60 minutes/hours * 60 seconds/minute
= 365 * 24 * 60 * 60 seconds
= 3,15,36,000 seconds
Thus, there are 3,15,36,000 seconds in the year 2001. Also, three babies born are every second.
Hence, total babies born
= 3 * 3,15,36,000 seconds
= 9,46,08,000
The letters P, Q, R, S, T, U and V, not necessarily in that order represents seven consecutive
integers from 22 to 33.
U is as much less than Q as R is greater than S.
V is greater than U.
Q is the middle term.
P is 3 greater than S.
Can you find the sequence of letters from the lowest value to the highest value?
Answer
The sequence of letters from the lowest value to the highest value is TUSQRPV.
From (3), Q is the middle term.
___ ___ ___ _Q_ ___ ___ ___
From (4), there must be exactly 2 numbers between P and S which gives two possible positions.
[1] ___ _S_ ___ _Q_ _P_ ___ ___
[2] ___ ___ _S_ _Q_ ___ _P_ ___
From (1), the number of letters between U and Q must be same as the number of letters between
S and R. Also, the number of
letters between them can be 1, 2 or 3.
Using trial and error, it can be found that there must be 2 letters between them. Also, it is possible
only in option [2] above.
[2] ___ _U_ _S_ _Q_ _R_ _P_ ___
From (2) V must be the highest and the remaining T must be the lowest number.
_T_ _U_ _S_ _Q_ _R_ _P_ _V_
Thus, the sequence of letters from the lowest value to the highest value is TUSQRPV.
There are 4 novels - Thriller, Mystery, Romance and Science Fiction - writen by Ambrose,
Richards, Hooper and Walsh, and
published by Alpha, Beta, Gamma and Theta not in necessarily in the same order.
The book by Ambrose is published by Theta.
The Thriller is published by Alpha.
The Science Fiction novel is by Hooper and is not published by Gamma.
.
The Romance novel is by Walsh.
Who are the Author and the Publisher of each novels?
Answer
(Thriller-Richards-Alpha), (Mystery-Ambrose-Theta), (Romance-Walsh-Gamma), (Science Fiction-
Hooper-Beta)
From (1), (2) and (3) the Science Fiction novel is by Hooper and published by Beta.
From (4) the Romance novel is by Walsh and published by Gamma.
Now it is obvious that the Mystery is published by Theta and written by Ambrose. And the Thriller
is published by Alpha and
written by Richards.
Novel Type Author Publisher
Thriller Richards Alpha
Mystery Ambrose Theta
Romance Walsh Gamma
Science Fiction Hooper Beta
There is a girl running from some robbers. She holds two solid gold balls each weighing 20
pounds. She comes to an old rope
bridge and a sign that says max weight 130 pounds.
Knowing her weight was 100 pounds, she walked across the bridge with both gold balls, without the
bridge breaking. How did she
do that?
Submitted by : Steven
Answer
She juggled the balls so that one ball was always in the air when she walked across the bridge.
What are the next two letters in the series?
E, O, E, R, E, X, N, T, E, _, _
Submitted by : Katie Cinquegrana
Answer
The next two letters in the series are N and N
The pattern is - Last letter of the numbers starting from 1 when written in English i.e. onE, twO,
threE, fouR, fivE, siX, seveN,
eighT, ninE, teN, eleveN, twelvE, etc...
A stick of length 1 is divided randomly into 3 parts.
What is the probability that a triangle can be made with those three parts?
.
Answer
The probability, that a triangle can be made by randomly dividing a stick of length 1 into 3 parts, is
25%
A triangle can be made, if and only if, sum of two sides is greater than the third side. Thus,
X1 < X2 + X3
X2 < X3 + X1
X3 < X1 + X2
Also, it is given that X1 + X2 + X3 = 1
From above equations: X1 < 1/2, X2 < 1/2, X3 < 1/2
Thus, a triangle can be formed, if all three sides are less than 1/2 and sum is 1.
Now, let's find the probability that one of X1, X2, X3 is greater than or equal to 1/2.
Note that to divide stick randomly into 3 parts, we need to choose two numbers P and Q, both are
between 0 & 1 and P
Now, X1 will be greater than or equal to 1/2, if and only if both the numbers, P & Q, are greater
than or equal to 1/2. Thus,
probability of X1 being greater than or equal to 1/2 is = (1/2) * (1/2) = 1/4
Similarly, X3 will be greater than or equal to 1/2, if and only if both the numbers, P & Q, are less
than or equal to 1/2. Thus,
probability of X3 being greater than or equal to 1/2 is = (1/2) * (1/2) = 1/4
Also, probability of X2 being greater than or equal to 1/2 is = (1/2) * (1/2) = 1/4
The probability that a triangle can not be made
= (1/4) + (1/4) + (1/4)
= (3/4)
Thus, the probability that a triangle can be made
= 1 - (3/4)
= (1/4)
= 25 %
Thus, the probability that a triangle can be made by randomly dividing a stick of length 1 into 3
parts is 25%
Let's generalise the problem. What is the probability that a polygon with (N+1) sides can be made
from (N+1) segments
obtained by randomly dividing a stick of length l into (N+1) parts?
The probability is = 1 - (N+1)*(1/2)^N
The probability tends to 1 as N grows. Thus, it is easier to make a N-sided polygon than it is to
make a triangle!!!
How many ways are there of arranging the sixteen black or white pieces of a standard international
chess set on the first two rows
of the board?
Given that each pawn is identical and each rook, knight and bishop is identical to its pair.
Answer
6,48,64,800 ways
There are total 16 pieces which can be arranged on 16 places in 16P16 = 16! ways.
(16! = 16 * 15 * 14 * 13 * 12 * ..... * 3 * 2 * 1)
But, there are some duplicate combinations because of identical pieces.
There are 8 identical pawn, which can be arranged in 8P8 = 8! ways.
.
Similarly there are 2 identical rooks, 2 identical knights and 2 identical bishops. Each can be
arranged in 2P2 = 2!
ways.
Hence, the require answer is
= (16!) / (8! * 2! * 2! * 2!)
= 6,48,64,800
My first is in blue, but not in glue
My second in old but not in new
My third in look but not in see
My last in ask but not in plea
My whole has leaves but not a flower
It will help you pass an idle hour
What am I?
Answer
Book
Can you arrange nine buttons to make ten rows, three buttons in each row?
Submitted by : Nathan Frankl
Answer
Nine buttons can be arranged to make 10 rows of 3 buttons each.
@@@
@@@
@@@
What are the next two numbers in this series?
1, 4, 1, 5, 9, 2, _, _
Answer
Next two numbers are 6 and 5.
The patten is the each digit in the value of PI after the decimal point. The value of mathematical
constant PI is 3.1415926536.
.
Eleven boys and girls wait to take their seats in the same row in a movie theater. There are exactly
11 seats in the row.
They decided that after the first person sits down, the next person has to sit next to the first. The
third sits next to one of the first two
and so on until all eleven are seated. In other words, no person can take a seat that separates
him/her from at least one other
person.
How many different ways can this be accomplished? Note that the first person can choose any of
the 11 seats.
Answer
There are 1024 different ways.
This is the type of Brain Teaser that can be solved using the method of induction.
If there is just a one person and one seat, that person has only one option.
If there are two persons and two seats, it can be accomplished in 2 different ways.
If there are three persons and three seats, it can be accomplished in 4 different ways. Remember
that no person can take a
seat that separates him/her from at least one other person.
Similarly, four persons and four seats produce 8 different ways. And five persons with five seats
produce 16 different ways.
It can be seen that with each additional person and seat, the different ways increase by the power
of two. For six persons with
six seats, there are 32 different ways.
For any number N, the different possible ways are 2(N-1)
Thus, for 11 persons and 11 seats, total different ways are 210 i.e. 1024
There are two ropes. Each one can burn in exactly one hour. They are not necessarily of the same
length or width as each other.
They also are not of uniform width (may be thiner/wider in middle than on the end), thus burning
half of the rope is not necessarily
1/2 hour.
By burning the ropes, how do you measure exactly 45 minutes worth of time?
Answer
If you light both ends of one rope simultaneously, it will burn in exactly a 1/2 hour. Thus, burn
one rope from both ends and the
other rope from only one end. Once the one rope (which is burning from both ends) finally burns
out (and you know a 1/2 hour
has elapsed), you also know that the other rope (which is burning from only one end) has exactly
1/2 hour left to burn. Since
you only want 45 minutes, light the second end of the rope. This remaining piece will burn in 15
minutes. Thus, totaling 45
minutes
In Laloo's family, each son has the same number of sisters and brothers. Also, each daughter has
twice the number of brothers
than sisters.
How many sons and daughters does Laloo have?
Answer
4 sons and 3 daughters
Laloo must be having one more son then daughter, as each son has same number of sisters and
brothers. Using this and little
.
trial-and-error, we can get the result i.e. 4 sons and 3 daughters.
Each brother has 3 sisters and 3 brothers.
Each sister has 2 sisters and 4 brothers.
A frog starts climbing 15 feet wall. Each hour he climbs 3 feet and rests for 30 minutes. During
rest, he slips back 2 feet.
How many hours does the frog take to reach the top?
Answer
19 hours
A frog climbs 1 foot per 1 1/2 hours as during 30 minutes rest he slips back 2 feet. This way he will
climb 12 feet in 18 hours. In
next hour he will climb 3 more feet i.e. he will complete 15 feet in 19 hours and will reach the top
of the wall.
What are the next two in the series?
st, nd, rd, th, th, ..., ...
Submitted by : Christopher Colon
Answer
The answer is th and th
The pattern is the suffix of each number when counted i.e. 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th and so
on...
To move a Safe, two cylindrical steel bars 7 inches in diameter are used as rollers.
How far will the safe have moved forward when the rollers have made one revolution?
Answer
The safe must have moved 22 inches forward.
If the rollers make one revolution, the safe will move the distance equal to the circumference of
the roller. Hence, the distance
covered by the safe is
= PI * Diameter (or 2 * PI * Radius)
= PI * 7
= 3.14159265 * 7
= 21.99115
= 22 inches approx.
.
On Sunday, December 22, four ships - W, X, Y, Z - started their series of winter cruises to various
ports.
Ship W left at 4:00 PM on Sunday, December 22, for a series of 8-days cruises to Mandva.
Ship X left at 4:30 PM on Sunday, December 22, for a series of alternating 11-days and 13-days
cruises to Alibaug.
Ship Y left at 5:00 PM on Sunday, December 22, for a series of 5-days cruises to Khihim.
Ship Z left on Monday for a series of 7-days cruises.
Each ship is scheduled to return back early in the morning after the last day of the cruise and leave
again late in the afternoon of
the same day.
On how many days occasions between December 22 and February 28 will three ships be moored
at the port?
Answer
On no occasions (other than start date December 22) between December 22 and February 28,
three ships will be
moored at the port.
Find out the days on when each ship will be in port:
Ship W will be in port on days 1, 9, 17, 25, 33, 41, 49, 57 and 65.
Ship X will be in port on days 1, 12, 25, 36, 49, 60 and 73.
Ship Y will be in port on days 1, 6, 11, 16, 21, 26, 31, 36, 41, 46, 51, 56, 61 and 66.
Ship Z will be in port on days 1, 2, 9, 16, 23, 30, 37, 44, 51, 58 and 65.
From above data, it is clear that - on no occasion (other than December 22) will three ships be
moored at the port.
Also, on 8 occasions, there will be 2 ships moored at the port.
I can be long, or I can be short.
I can be grown, or I can be bought.
I can be painted, or I can be left bare.
I can be round, or I can be square.
What am I?
Submitted by : Cain
Answer
Fingernail
Wood is also the possible answer.
There is a blind man, a deaf man, and a man with no arms.
Something falls from the sky, the blind man sees it, the deaf man hears it and the man with no
arms picks it up and puts it in his
pocket.
What is it?
Submitted by : Joe Leonard
Answer
Nothing
.
"Nothing" falls from the sky, the blind man sees "Nothing", the deaf man hears "Nothing" and the
man with no arms picks
"Nothing" up and puts "Nothing" in his pocket.
While sitting in a club where all single men tell the truth and all married men lie, a woman is
approached by three men.
She asks the first guy if he is married, but the music is so loud that she can not hear his answer.
So she turns to the second guy, who tells her, "The first guy said, 'I am married', but he is really
single."
Then she turns to the third guy, who says, "The second guy is single."
Can you determine the marital status of each of the three men?
Submitted by : Marie
Answer
All three are married.
A single man would always say that he is single. And a married man would also always say that he is
single. It means that no
man in the club would say that he is married. Thus, the second man is lying, so the second man is
married.
Since the second man (always lies) says the first man is single, the first man is married.
Similarly, the third man incorrectly says that the second man is single. Hence, the third man is
lying and he is married.
Thus, all three are lying and hence, married.
There are 4 army men. They have been captured by a rebel group and have been held at
ransom. An army intelligent officer orders them to be burried deep in dirt up to their necks. The
format of their burrial are as shown in the figure.
Conditions
They each have hats on their heads. either black(b) or white (w) look at diagram above. There
are total 2 white hats and 2
black hats.
They only look in front of them not behind. They are not allowed to communicate by talking.
Between army man 1 and 2, there is a wall.
Captive man 4 can see the colour of hats on 2 and 3
3 can only see 2's hat
2 can only see a wall and 1 can see a wall too, but is on the other side
The officer speaks up, "If one of you can correctly tell me the colour of your hat, you will all go
scott free back to your contries. If
you are wrong, you will all be killed.
How can one of them be certain about the hat they are wearing and not risk the lives of their fellow
souldiers by taking a 50/50
guess!
Submitted by : KWEKU
Answer
Either soldier 3 or soldier 4 can save the life as soldier 1 and soldier 2 can not see colour of any
hat, even not their own.. In our
case soldier 3 will tell the colour of his hat.
Soldier 4 can see the hat on soldier 2 and soldier 3. If both are white, then he can be sure about
colour of his hat which will be
black and vice-versa. But if one of them is white and one is black, then soldier 4 can not say
anything as he can have either of
them. So he will keep mum.
If soldier 4 won't say anyhing for a while, then soldier 3 will know that soldier 4 is not in position to
tell the colour of hat on his
hat. It means that colour of soldier 3's hat is opposite of colour of soldier 2's hat. So soldier 3 can
tell correctly the colour of hat
on his head which is Black.
.
Here, we are assuming that all the soldiers are intelligent enough. Also, this solution will work for
any combination of 2 Black
hats and 2 White hats.
Five executives of a Cultural Committee hold a conference in Mumbai.
Mr. A converses in English and Marathi.
Mr. B converses in Hindi and English.
Mr. C converses in Marathi and Hindi.
Mr. D converses in Hindi and Gujarati.
Mr. E, a native Marathi, can also converse in Gujarati.
If a sixth executive is brought in, to be understood by the maximum number of the original five, he
should be fluent in which 2
languages?
Answer
The sixth person should be fluent in Hindi & Marathi.
Find out how many executives can understand each of the language.
Three executives speak Hindi - Mr. B, Mr. C and Mr. D. The other two executives - Mr. A and
Mr. E, speak Marathi. Thus, the
sixth executive should be fluent in Hindi and Marathi so that original five executives can converse
with him.
In the village called TALAJA, only three TV channels are available - Moon Plus, Mony and Mee
TV.
Out of 4000 TV viewers in the village, 1500 watch Moon TV, 2000 watch Mony and 2500 watch
Mee TV.
Amongst these, 500 viewers watch Moon Plus and Mony, 800 watch Moon Plus and Mee TV, and
1000 watch Mony and Mee TV.
How many viewers watch all three channels?
Answer
300 viewers watch all three channels.
Let's assume that total X viewers watch all three channels.
total viewers who watch only Moon Plus and Mony = 500-X
total viewers who watch only Moon Plus and Mee TV = 800-X
total viewers who watch only Mony and Mee TV = 1000-X
total viewers who watch only Moon Plus
= 1500 - (500-X) - (800-X) - X
= 200 + X
total viewers who watch only Mony
= 2000 - (500-X) - (1000-X) - X
= 500 + X
total viewers who watch only Mee TV
= 2500 - (1000-X) - (800-X) - X
= 700 + X
We know that total viewers are 4000. Summing up all 7 values,
X + (500 - X) + (800 - X) + (1000 - X) + (200 + X) + (500 + X) + (700 + X) = 4000
X + 3700 = 4000
.
X = 300
Hence, total 300 viewers watch all three channels.
Five friends with surname Batliwala, Pocketwala, Talawala, Chunawala and Natakwala have their
first name and middle name as
follow.
1. Four of them have a first and middle name of Paresh.
2. Three of them have a first and middle name of Kamlesh.
3. Two of them have a first and middle name of Naresh.
4. One of them have a first and middle name of Elesh.
5. Pocketwala and Talawala, either both are named Kamlesh or neither is named Kamlesh.
6. Either Batliwala and Pocketwala both are named Naresh or Talawala and Chunawala both are
named Naresh.
7. Chunawala and Natakwala are not both named Paresh.
Who is named Elesh?
Answer
Pocketwala is named Elesh.
From (1) and (7), it is clear that Batliwala, Pocketwala and Talawala are named Paresh.
From (6) and (5), if Pocketwala or Talawala both are named Kamlesh, then either of them will
have three names i.e. Paresh,
Kamlesh and Naresh. Hence, Pocketwala and Talawala both are not named Kamlesh. It means
that Batliwala, Chunawala and
Natakwala are named Kamlesh.
Now it is clear that Talawala and Chunawala are named Naresh. Also, Pocketwala is named Elesh.
You have 13 balls which all look identical. All the balls are the same weight except for one. Using
only a balance scale, can find the
odd one out with only 3 weighings?
Is it possible to always tell if the odd one out is heavier or lighter than the other balls?
Submitted by : Brett Hurrell
Answer
It is always possible to find odd ball in 3 weighings and in most of the cases it is possible to tell
whether the odd ball is heavier
or lighter. Only in one case, it is not possible to tell the odd ball is whether heavier or lighter.
1. Take 8 balls and weigh 4 against 4.
o If both are not equal, goto step 2
o If both are equal, goto step 3
2. One of these 8 balls is the odd one. Name the balls on heavier side of the scale as H1, H2, H3
and H4. Similarly,
name the balls on the lighter side of the scale as L1, L2, L3 and L4. Either one of H's is heavier or
one of L's is lighter.
Weigh (H1, H2, L1) against (H3, H4, X) where X is one ball from the remaining 5 balls in intial
weighing.
o If both are equal, one of L2, L3, L4 is lighter. Weigh L2 against L3.
If both are equal, L4 is the odd ball and is lighter.
If L2 is light, L2 is the odd ball and is lighter.
If L3 is light, L3 is the odd ball and is lighter.
.
o If (H1, H2, L1) is heavier side on the scale, either H1 or H2 is heavier. Weight H1 against H2
If both are equal, there is some error.
If H1 is heavy, H1 is the odd ball and is heavier.
o If (H3, H4, X) is heavier side on the scale, either H3 or H4 is heavier or L1 is lighter. Weight
H3 against H4
If both are equal, L1 is the odd ball and is lighter.
3. One of the remaining 5 balls is the odd one. Name the balls as C1, C2, C3, C4, C5. Weight
(C1, C2, C3) against (X1,
X2, X3) where X1, X2, X3 are any three balls from the first weighing of 8 balls.
o If both are equal, one of remaining 2 balls is the odd i.e. either C4 or C5. Weigh C4 with X1
If both are equal, C5 is the odd ball. But you can not tell whether it is heavier or lighter.
If C4 is heavy, C4 is the odd ball and is heavier.
If C4 is light, C4 is the odd ball and is lighter.
o If (C1, C2, C3) is heavier side, one of C1, C2, C3 is the odd ball and is heavier. Weigh C1 and
C2.
If both are equal, C3 is the odd ball and is heavier.
o If (C1, C2, C3) is lighter side, one of C1, C2, C3 is the odd ball and is lighter. Weigh C1 and C2.
If both are equal, C3 is the odd ball and is heavier.
A positive integer that, when added to 1000 gives a sum which is greater than when multiplied by
1000.
Find the positive integer.
Answer
The positive integer is 1.
Sum of 1 and 1000 = 1 + 1000 = 1001
Multiplication of 1 and 1000 = 1 * 1000 = 1000
Thus, sum of 1 and 1000 is greater than the multiplication of 1 and 1000.
A champion weight lifter has a brother that's a doctor, but the same doctor doesn't have a brother.
How are they related then?
Submitted by : Brynn
.
Answer
The champion weight lifter is a sister of the doctor i.e. they are Brother and Sister
The champion weight lifter is a Woman. Her brother is a doctor. The doctor doesn't have a
brother, but a sister.
A boy goes into a shop to buy some sweets. He uses a £1 coin and buys 40p worth of sweets. The
shop assistant gives him two
coins for his change.
One of them was not a 50p so how could the boy have gotten his exact change?
Submitted by : Lynsey
Answer
One of them was 10p and the other one was 50p.
The boy got two coins, 50p and 10p. One of them was not a 50p. But the other one was.
Always talked of,
Never heard,
Never forgotten,
Everybody waits for it,
It always comes,
Never stays,
Always looked for,
Never found.
What am I?
Answer
Tomorrow or Future
There are 20 people in your applicant pool, including 5 pairs of identical twins.
If you hire 5 people randomly, what are the chances you will hire at least 1 pair of identical twins?
(Needless to say, this could
cause trouble ;))
Submitted by : Tim Sanders
Answer
The probability to hire 5 people with at least 1 pair of identical twins is 25.28%
5 people from the 20 people can be hired in 20C5 = 15504 ways.
Now, divide 20 people into two groups of 10 people each :
G1 - with all twins
.
G2 - with all people other than twins
Let's find out all possible ways to hire 5 people without a single pair of indentical twins.
People from
G1
People from
G2
No of ways to hire G1 without a single pair of
indentical twins
No of ways to hire
G2
Total
ways
0 5 10C0 10C5 252
1 4 10C1 10C4 2100
2 3 10C2 * 8/9 10C3 4800
3 2 10C3 * 8/9 * 6/8 10C2 3600
4 1 10C4 * 8/9 * 6/8 * 4/7 10C1 800
5 0 10C5 * 8/9 * 6/8 * 4/7 * 2/6 10C0 32
Total 11584
Thus, total possible ways to hire 5 people without a single pair of indentical twins = 11584 ways
So, total possible ways to hire 5 people with at least a single pair of indentical twins = 15504 -
11584 = 3920 ways
Hence, the probability to hire 5 people with at least a single pair of indentical twins
= 3920/15504
= 245/969
= 0.2528
= 25.28%
Computer - Lampshade
Book - Money
Gecko - Wallet
Cookie - ?
What can Cookie go with?
Available Options: Desk, Mouse, Glove, Printer, Tortilla, Checkerboard, Wall, China
Submitted by : Alessandro Tabora
Answer
Cookie can go with either Printer or Checkerboard.
There are two possible answers here.
Answer I - Printer
The patteren is - In each word pair, the first word has N characters whereas the second word has
N+1 characters.
Computer (8) - Lampshade (9)
Book (4) - Money (5)
Gecko (5) - Wallet (6)
Cookie (6) - Printer (7)
Answer II - Checkerboard
The patteren is - In each word pair, both words has same number of vowels.
Computer (3) - Lampshade (3)
Book (2) - Money (2)
Gecko (2) - Wallet (2)
Cookie (4) - Checkerboard (4)
.
Only one color, but not one size
Stuck at the bottom, but easily flies
Present in the sun, but not in the rain
Doing no harm, and feeling no pain
What am I?
Submitted by : Karen
Answer
Shadow
Shadow is always Black and of different sizes. It is always stuck at the bottom i.e. ground, but easily
flies. Always present in the
sun, but not in the rain. And it is doing no harm, and feeling no pain.
If a bear eats 65 pounds in fish every day EXCEPT every 6th day which it only eats 45 pounds of
fish.
If the bear continues this, how many pounds of fish will it eat in 200 days?
Answer
The bear will eat 12,340 pounds of fish in 200 days.
It is given that on every 6th day beareats 45 pounds of fish i.e. on day number 6, 12, 18, 24, ....
192, 198 the bear eats 45
pounds of fish.
Total number of 6th days = 200/6 = 33 (the bear eats 45 pounds)
Hence, the normal days are = 200 - 33 = 167 (the bear eats 65 pounds)
Thus, in 200 days, the bear will eat
= (167) * (65) + (33) * (45)
= 10855 + 1485
= 12,340 pounds
In a small town, there are three temples in a row and a well in front of each temple. A pilgrim
came to the town with certain number
of flowers.
Before entering the first temple, he washed all the flowers he had with the water of well. To his
surprise, flowers doubled. He
offered few flowers to the God in the first temple and moved to the second temple. Here also,
before entering the temple he
washed the remaining flowers with the water of well. And again his flowers doubled. He offered
few flowers to the God in second
temple and moved to the third temple. Here also, his flowers doubled after washing them with
water. He offered few flowers to the
God in third temple.
There were no flowers left when pilgrim came out of third temple and he offered same number of
flowers to the God in all three
temples.
What is the minimum number of flowers the pilgrim had initially? How many flower did he offer
to each God?
Answer
.
The pilgrim had 7 flowers, initially and he offered 8 flowers to each God.
Assume that the pilgrim had X flowers initially and he offered Y flowers to each God.
From the above figure, there are (8X - 7Y) flowers when the pilgrim came out of the third temple.
But it is given that there were
no flowers left when he came out of third temple. It means that
(8X - 7Y) = 0
8X = 7Y
The minimum values of X and Y are 7 and 8 respectively to satisfy above equation. Hence, the
pilgrim had 7 flowers and he
offered 8 flowers to each God.
In general, the pilgrim had 7N flowers initially and he offered 8N flowers to each God, where N =
1, 2, 3, 4, .....
The man who makes it sells it.
The man who buys it doesn't use it.
The man who uses it doesn't see it.
What is it?
Submitted by : Lynsey
Answer
A coffin
The man who makes it sells it as it is of no use for him. The man who buys it doesn't use it
because he is still alive. And the
man who uses it doesn't see it because he is dead.
How many parts can a circle be divided into drawing four straight lines? Give the maximum
possible answer.
Submitted by : Kimi
Answer
.
The circle can be divided into 11 parts by drawing 4 straight line.
The trick is whenever you draw a line, it should cut all previously drawn lines and no more than 2
lines should pass through any
intersaction point.
Using above, whenever you draw line number N, the maximum possible parts are increased by N.
Intially, without any lines
there is one part. Hence whenver you draw N lines, the maximum possible parts are :
= 1 + (1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + ...... + N)
= 1 + (N * (N + 1)) /2
Using 1, 5, 6, 7 only once make 21 using the operations +, -, *, /, ( and ) only.
Submitted by : Timmy Chan
Answer
The answer is
6 / (1 - 5/7) = 21
Thanks to Timmy !!!
A group of friends went on a holiday to a hill station. It rained for 13 days. But when it rained in
the morning, the afternoon was
lovely. And when it rained in the afternoon, the day was preceded by clear morning.
Altogether there were 11 very nice mornings and 12 very nice afternoons. How many days did
their holiday last?
Answer
The holiday last for 18 days.
Let's assume the number of days as follows:
Rain in the morning and lovely afternoon = X days
Clear morning and rain in the afternoon = Y days
No rain in the morning and in the afternoon = Z days
Number of days with rain = X + Y = 13 days
Number of days with clear mornings = Y + Z = 11 days
Number of days with clear afternoons = X + Z = 12 days
Solving above 3 equations, we get X = 7, Y = 6 and Z = 5
Hence, total number of days on holiday = 18 days
.
You throw away the outside.
You cook the inside.
You eat the outside.
You throw away the inside.
What is it?
Submitted by : Kimi
Answer
Corn.
You throw away the outside - peel the husk
You cook the inside - the ear, the yellow part
You then eat the outside - the cooked yellow part
You throw away the inside - the cob
A farmer built a fence around his 25 cows in a square region. He built it in such a way that one can
see 5 poles from either of the
four sides.
What are the minimum number of poles the farmer must have used?
Answer
16 poles
XXXXX
XX
XX
XX
XXXXX
One pole at each corner and three poles along each side so that one can always see 5 poles from
either of the four sides. The
corner pole is shared by two sides and hence reducing the number of poles to 16.
What appears once in a minute, twice in a moment, but not in a thousand years?
Submitted by : Amanda
Answer
The letter "M"
There is 1 M in a Minute, 2 M's in a MoMent and there are no M's in thousand years.
What goes up and never goes down?
.
@ mitted : @Castr
Answr
Th answr is Ag.
As o grow , o g or an o r ag gos . Ag nvr gos own.
Brain Tasr No : 00321
Wha is harr o cach h fasr o r n?
@ mi : Lisa
Answr
Yo r rah or @haow
Th fasr o r n, h harr i is o cach o r rah/shaow.
Brain Tasr No : 00322
@LIDE
-DEAN
---------
3651
Each of svn gs from 0-9 ar rrsn a ffrn r aov s ch ha h s racon s
r .
Wha wor rrsns 3651?
Answr
3651 rrsns LEN@.
L's assgn oss va s o ach r an hn s ra-n-rror.
@ m s 1.
Thn D ( nr L) m s grar han 5. If D s 6, hn L s 0. B hn A m s 0 or 1 whch
s moss. Hnc, h
oss va s of D ar 7, 8 or 9.
N m s E + 1. Aso, D m s A + 5 as h oss va s of D ar 7, 8 or 9, D can no
(10+A) + 5.
Now sng ra-n-rror, w g @=1, I=2, L=3, A=4, N=5, E=6 an D=9
@LIDE13296
-DEAN-9645
-------------- --------------
3651LEN@
Hnc, 3651 rrsns LEN@.
Bran Tasr No : 00323
.
Fn nx wo n mrs n h srs :
100, 365, 24, 60, ?, ?
Answr
Th nx wo n mrs ar 60 an 1000.
Th arn s rakng own h m from Cn r o mscons.
Thr ar 100 ars n a cn r.
There are 365 days in a year.
There are 24 hours in a day.
There are 60 minutes in an hour.
There are 60 seconds in a minute.
There are 1000 miliseconds in a second.
Hence, the sequence is : 100, 365, 24, 60, 60, 1000
You have just built a house. However, you may only take certain items into the house. You can
take doors, but you aren't allowed
any windows. You can't have, but you are allowed coffee. A book is okay, but no paper. Finally,
you can take a puppy or kitten, but
you can't take a dog or cat.
Give one more thing that you can/can't take, and explain why.
@ubmitted by : J W
Answer
Anything with double letters in spelling is allowed and without double letters is not allowed.
If you you look at the spelling of the names of the items that are allowed in the house, you will
notice that they all have double
letters i.e. DOOR, BOOK, PUPPY, KITTEN
@o you can take items like Coffee, Balloon, Pillow.
What walk on 4 legs in the morning, 2 legs in the afternoon and 3 legs at the night?
@ubmitted by : jon
Answer
A human being
A human being crawls on 4 legs (2 legs + 2 hands) when child, walks on 2 legs when young and
walks on 3 legs (2 legs +
walking stick) when old.
The sum of their (father, mother and son) ages is 70. The father is 6 times as old as the son.
When the sum of their ages is twice 70, the father will be twice as old as the son.
How old is the mother?
@ubmitted by : Tim @anders
.
Answer
The mother is 29 years and 2 months old.
Let's assume that son is X years old. Hence, father is 6X years old and mother is (70-7X) years old.
It is given that the sum of their ages is 70, which will total 140 after 70/3 years.
After 70/3 years, son will be (X + 70/3) years old and father will be (6X + 70/3) years old. Also, it is
given that after 70/3 years,
the father will be twice as old as the son. Thus,
(6X + 70/3) = 2 * (X + 70/3)
6X + 70/3 = 2X + 140/3
4X = 70/3
X = 35/6
Hence, their ages are
Son = X = 35/6 = 5 years and 10 months
Father = 6X = 6(35/6) = 35 years
Mother = (70 - 7X) = 70 - 7(35/6) = 29 years and 2 months
How many squares are there in a 5 inch by 5 inch square grid? Note that the grid is made up of
one inch by one inch squares.
Submitted by : Kristin Monroe
Answer
There are 55 squares in a 5 by 5 grid.
There are 25 squares of one grid.
There are 16 squares of four grids i.e. 2 by 2
There are 9 squares of nine grids i.e. 3 by 3
There are 4 squares of sixteen grids i.e. 4 by 4
There is 1 square of twenty-five girds i.e. 5 by 5
Hence, there are total 25 + 16 + 9 + 4 + 1 = 55 squares.
You must have noticed one thing that total number squares possible of each size is always a perfact
square i.e. 25, 16, 9, 4, 1
For a grid of N by N, the possible number of squares are
= N2 + (N - 1)2 + (N - 2)2 + (N - 3)2 + ......... + 32 + 22 + 12
For 1 by 1 grid, total squares = 12 = 1
For 2 by 2 grid, total squares = 22 + 12 = 5
For 3 by 3 grid, total squares = 32 + 22 + 12 = 14
For 4 by 4 grid, total squares = 42 + 32 + 22 + 12 = 30
For 5 by 5 grid, total squares = 52 + 42 + 32 + 22 + 12 = 55
Three Gold (G) coins, three Silver (S) coins and three Copper (C) coins are arranged in a single
row as follow:
GSCGSCGSC
Only 2 adjacent unlike coins can be moved at any one time.
The moved coins must be in contact with at least one other coin in line. i.e. no pair of coins is to
be moved and placed
away from the remaining ones.
No coin pairs can be reversed i.e. a S-C combination must remain in that order in its new
positionwhen it is moved.
What is the minimum number of moves required to get all the coins in following order?
CCCSSSGGG
Show all moves.
.
Answer
Minimum number of moves are 8.
Move Order of Coins
0GSCGSCGSC
1GSGSCGSCC
2GSCGSCCSG
3GSCGSCCSG
4GSCCSGSCG
5GSCCSCSGG
6GSCCCSSGG
7CCCSSGGSG
8CCCSSSGGG
Draw 9 dots on a page, in the shape of three rows of three dots to form a square. Now place your
pen on the page, draw 4 straight
lines and try and cover all the dots.
You're not allowed to lift your pen.
Note: Don't be confined by the dimensions of the square.
Submitted by : Joe Lambe
Answer
Let's number the dots to simplify the explaination.
123Y
456
789
X
Where X, Y are just two imaginary points.
1. Draw the first line starting from point 1 and passing straight down through points 4, 7 and X.
2. Draw the second line starting from X and passing through 8, 6 and Y.
3. Draw the third line starting from Y and passing through 3, 2 and 1.
4. And now draw the forth and the final line starting from 1 and passing through 5 and 9.
You've often cut me through in the years
Yet it is you that bursts into tears
.
Who am I?
Submitted by : Dan Sattary-Javid
Answer
An Onion
A man has Ten Horses and nine stables as shown here.
[] [] [] [] [] [] [] [] []
The man wants to fit Ten Horses into nine stables. How can he fit Ten horses into nine stables?
@ bmitted b : @teve Wagner
Answer
The answer is simple. It sas the man wants to fit "Ten Horses" into nine stables. There are nine
letters in the phrase "Ten
Horses". @o o can p t one letter each in all nine stables.
[T] [E] [N] [H] [O] [R] [@] [E] [@]
Two women, X and Y, were selling Oranges in the market. X were selling 3 oranges for a R pee
and Y were selling 2 oranges for a
R pee.
One da each of them had 30 oranges nsold. The p t together the two lots of oranges and
decided to sell 5 oranges for Rs. 2.
According to their calc lation, 3 oranges for Rs. 1 and 2 oranges for Rs. 1 was exactl the same as
5 oranges for Rs. 2
Now, the were expecting to get Rs. 25 for the oranges, as the wo ld have got, if sold separatel.
B t to their s rprise the got
onl Rs. 24 for the entire lot of the 60 oranges.
Where did the one r pee go?
Answer
Woman X was selling 3 oranges for a R pee. Hence, the average price of one orange is (1/3) = Rs.
0.3333
Woman Y was selling 2 oranges for a R pee. Hence, the average price of one orange is (1/2) = Rs.
0.5
Now the p t together 60 oranges. Hence, the average price of one orange is (0.3333+0.5)/2 = Rs.
0.4167
B t, the were selling 5 oranges for Rs. 2. Hence, the average price of one orange is 2/5 = Rs. 0.4
The differnce is (0.4167 - 0.4) = 0.0167
There are 60 oranges. Hence (0.0167 * 60) = 1
@o here is that one r pee. Th s, one r pee didn't go anwhere, the did their math wrong.
Insert mathematical f nctions to convert the 3 n mbers on the left side of the eq ation to eq al 6.
I filled in the 2's ( sing the
addition f nction twice) for o to get o started.
111=6
.
2+2+2=6
333=6
444=6
555=6
666=6
777=6
888=6
999=6
@ m : Jon
Answr
(1 + 1 + 1)! = 6
2+2+2=6
(3 * 3) - 3 = 6
sqr(4) + sqr(4) + sqr(4) = 6
5 + (5 / 5) = 6
6+6-6=6
7 - (7 / 7) = 6
8 - sqr(sqr(8+8)) = 6
(sqr(9) * sqr(9)) - sqr(9) = 6
Bra Tasr No : 00339
Wha mrs
X a Y rprs h f
ll
w g srs:
2, 6, 12, 20, 30, 42, X, Y
@ m : Ml Gaagkar
A swr
X=56 a Y=72
Th par s h m lplca

f w
c
sc v mrs sa g wh 1.
Frs mr = 1 * 2 = 2
@c
mr = 2 * 3 = 6
Thr mr = 3 * 4 = 12
F
rh mr = 4 * 5 = 20
Ffh mr = 5 * 6 = 30
@xh mr = 6 * 7 = 42
@v h mr = 7 * 8 = 56
Eghh mr = 8 * 9 = 72
Alr avl, h pa ca f as a g a c
sa afr crm g 2
h
prv
s mr.
Frs mr = 2
@c
mr = 2 + 4 = 6
Thr mr = 6 + 6 = 12
F
rh mr = 12 + 8 = 20
.
Ffh mr = 20 + 10 = 30
@xh mr = 30 + 12 = 42
@v h mr = 42 + 14 = 56
Eighth number = 56 + 16 = 72
14, 316, 536, 764, ?, ?
@ubmitte b : Jan
Answer
The next two numbers are 9100 an 11144.
The pattern is - starting from 1, take 2 consecutive numbers an put the first number with the
square of the secon numebr.
First number = 1 (2)^2 = 14
@econ number = 3 (4)^2 = 316
Thir number = 5 (6)^2 = 536
Fourth number = 7 (8)^2 = 764
Fifth number = 9 (10)^2 = 9100
@ixth number = 11 (12)^2 = 11144
Hence, the next two numbers are 9100 an 11144.
I have two chilren. At least one of them is a bo. What is the probabilit that both m chilren
are bos?
M sister also has two chilren. The oler chil is a girl. What is the probabilit that both her
chilren are girls?
@ubmitte b : Dennis Yance
Answer
The probabilit that both m chilren are bos is 1/3. An that m sister's both chilren are girls is
1/2.
There are four possibilities of having two chilren (with the olest liste first):
1. (Girl, Girl)
2. (Girl, Bo)
3. (Bo, Girl)
4. (Bo, Bo)
As I have at least one bo, there are three possibilities i.e. 2, 3 an 4. An onl in one case both
are bos. Hence, the reqiure
probabilit is 1/3.
@imilarl, since m sister's oler chil is girl, there are just two possibilities i.e. 1 an 2. An again,
onl in one case both are
girls. Hence, the reqiure probabilit is 1/2.
What are the next three numbers in the given series?
123212342123432???
.
Answer
The next three numbers are 3, 4 and 5.
The pattern is - the number of letters in the Roman numeral representation of the numbers i.e.
number of letters in I, II, III, IV,
V, VI, VII, VIII, IX, X, XI, XII, XIII, XIV, XV, .....
Hence, the next numbers in the given series are 3(XVI), 4(XVII), 5(XVIII), 3(XIX), 2(XX),
3(XXI), 4(XXII), 5(XXIII), 4(XXIV),
3(XXV), etc...
A terrorist, after having comitted a crime wanted to cross the border. He knew that a pick up
vehicle had been arranged at the
border for him. But the driver would identify him by a code word which the terrorist didn't know.
So he mailed to his group leader
using a certain code language. This is what he mailed:
TWDK XJ KWQ GIPQ TIFP X HQQP KI LJQ DK KWQ YIFPQF?
His group leader replied back on mail, saying:
ZIL HQQP KI JDZ KWDK "XR TXJWQJ TQFQ WIFJQJ YQVVDFJ TILCP FXPQ"
Can you decipher the code and make out as to what the terrorist mailed and what was the reply
sent back to him?
HINT : In the code language,QUEEN ELIZABETH can be written as ELQQH
QCXADYQKW
Submitted by : Milind Gadagkar
Answer
The terrorist mailed : WHAT IS THE CODE WORD I NEED TO USE AT THE BORDER?
The Leader replied : YOU NEED TO SAY THAT "IF WISHES WERE HORSES BEGGARS
WOULD RIDE"
Use the hint. It says that "In the code language, QUEEN ELIZABETH can be written as ELQQH
QCXADYQKW." It means that
in code language E means Q, L means U, Q means E, H means N and so on.
QUEENELIZABETH
ELQQHQCXADYQKW
Use the above hint and put decode the corresponding characters.
The terrorist:
TWDKXJKWQGIPQTIFPX
HATITHEEI
HQQPKILJQDKKWQYIFPQF?
NEETUEATTHEBE
The leader:
GILHQQPKIJDZKWDK
UNEETATHAT
"XRTXJWQJTQFQWIFJQJ
IIHEEEHE
.
YQVVDFJTILCPFXPQ"
EAULIE
Now try to figure out some words like WHAT, NEED, TO, USE, IS etc. and decode the
sentences further using the characters
you get from that.
Countinue the above procedure, you can figure out more words like CODE, WORD, YOU,
SAY, IF, WERE, HORSES, WOULD
etc. and finally you will get the answer.
At the entrance to a members club stands a stranger seeking admission. A friend told him that it's
easy to get in. You just have to
answer a question corrcetly! Answering wrong, however, will result in being shot!
To live a little longer, the man waits in a back alley near the entrance for people to go in. After a
while a man comes to the
entrance. The door warden asks him: "Twelve?" to which he replies "Six!" and goes in.
"That's easy." our friend thinks, but he waits a little longer.
Another man comes to the door. "Six?" the door warden asks, to which he replies "Three!" and
goes in.
"That's too good to be true" our friend thinks, and he was right. Because, when asked "Four?", he
answered "Two!" and was found
dead in the alley.
What was the correct answer?
Submitted by : Milind Gadagkar
Answer
The correct answer was "Four".
The answer is the number of letters in the word spoken by the door warden.
"Twelve" contains "Six" letters i.e. T, W, E, L, V, E
"Six" contains "Three" letters i.e. S, I, X
Similarly, "Four" contains "Four" letters i.e. F, O, U, R
There are 10 statements written on a piece of paper:
1. At least one of statements 9 and 10 is true.
2. This either is the first true or the first false statement.
3. There are three consecutive statements, which are false.
4. The difference between the numbers of the last true and the first true statement divides the
number, that is to be found.
5. The sum of the numbers of the true statements is the number, that is to be found.
6. This is not the last true statement.
7. The number of each true statement divides the number, that is to be found.
8. The number that is to be found is the percentage of true statements.
9. The number of divisors of the number, that is to be found, (apart from 1 and itself) is greater
than the sum of the numbers
of the true statements.
10. There are no three consecutive true statements.
Find the minimal possible number?
@ubmitted b : Milind Gadagkar
.
Answer
The numebr is 420.
If statement 6 is false, it creates a paradox. Hence, @tatement 6 must be true.
Consider @tatement 2:
If it is true, it must be the first true statement. Otherwise, it creates a paradox.
If it is false, it must be the second false statement. Otherwise, it creates a paradox.
In both the cases, @tatement 1 is false.
As @tatement 1 is false, @tatement 9 and @tatement 10 both are false i.e. there are three consecutive
true statements.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
False - - - - True - - False False
Let\'s assume that @tatement 3 is false i.e. there are no three consecutive false statements. It means
that @tatement 2 and
@tatement 8 must be true, else there will be three consecutive false statements.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
False True False - - True - True False False
Also, atleast two of @tatements 4, 5 and 7 must be true as there are three consecutive true
statements.
According to @tatement 8, the number that is to be found is the percentage of true statements.
Hence, number is either 50 or
60. Now if @tatement 7 is true, then the number of each true statement divides the number, that is
to be found. But 7 and 8 do
not divide either 50 or 60. Hence, @tatement 7 is false which means that @tatement 4 and 5 are
true. But @tatement 5
contradicts the @tatement 8. Hence, our assumption that @tatement 3 is false is wrong and
@tatement 3 is true i.e. there are 3
consecutive false statements which means that @tatement 8 is false as there is no other possibilities
of 3 consecutive false
statements.
Also, @tatement 7 is true as @tatement 6 is not the last true statement.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
False - True - - True True False False False
According to @tatement 7, the number of each true statement divides the number, that is to be
found. And according to
Statement 5, the sum of the numbers of the true statements is the number, that is to be found. For
all possible combinations
Statement 5 is false.
There 3 consecutive true statements. Hence, Statement 2 and Statement 4 are true.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
False True True True False True True False False False
Now, the conditions for the number to be found are:
1. The numebr is divisible by 5 (Statement 4)
2. The numebr is divisible by 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 (Statement 7)
3. The number of divisors of the number, that is to be found, (apart from 1 and itself) is not
greater than the sum of the
numbers of the true statements. (Statement 9)
The minimum possible number is 420.
The divisors of 420, apart from 1 and itself are 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 12, 14, 15, 20, 21, 28, 30, 35, 42,
60, 70, 84, 105, 140, 210.
There are total of 22 divisors. Also, the sum of the numbers of the true statements is 22
(2+3+4+6+7=22), which satisfies the
third condition.
.
In order to conduct the work at store it is necessary to have a minimum of three workers each day.
The staff consists of five
persons who work on part time basis. Alice can work on Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays. Betty
cannot report for work on
Wednesdays. Carol can report for work on Tuesdays and Wednesdays only. Dorothy cannot work
on Fridays. Emmy is available
anytime except on the first Monday and Thursday of the month.
During which day of the week, might it be impossible to conduct the work at store? Note that the
store remains close on Sundays.
Answer
It will be impossible to conduct the work on first thursday.
Summarizing the availability of staff day-wise.
Monday - Alice, Betty, Dorothy, Emmy (except first Monday)
Tuesday - Betty, Carol, Dorothy, Emmy
Wednesday - Alice, Carol, Dorothy, Emmy
Thursday - Betty, Dorothy, Emmy (except first Thursday)
Friday - Alice, Betty, Emmy
Saturday - Betty, Dorothy, Emmy
Betty and Dorothy are available on all Thursday. Emmy is also available on Thursdays, except first
Thursday. Hence, on first
Thursday it will be impossible to conduct the work.
If 6 x 4 = 12
8 x 6 = 32
11 x 8 = 66
then 10 x 10 = ??
@ mitte : Nick Chimenti
Answer
80
The pattern is m ltipl the first n mer secon after re cing secon n mer 2. One can
view is as follow:
6 x (4 - 2) = 12
8 x (6 - 2) = 32
11 x (8 - 2) = 66
10 x (10 - 2) = 80
It can hol o ,
B t o cannot hol it.
An the more o remove,
The igger it will get.
What is it?
Answer
A hole
.
Here is the 7 step proof which sas 2=1.
a an are non-zero integers.
1. a =
2. a*a = a*
3. a*a - * = a* - *
4. (a + ) * (a - ) = * (a - )
5. a + =
6. 2* =
7. 2 = 1
Is it Correct? If not, then what is wrong with the proof?
Answer
The proof is false. It is ovio s that 2 is not eq al to 1. The step 5 is wrong altho gh it is j st a
iviing oth the sies (a - ).
It is given in the first step that a = which means that (a - ) = 0. Yo get step 5 after iviing oth
the sies (a -). B t o
can not ivie (a - ) as in mathematics ivision 0 is not a vali operation. (Division Zero)
Montu, Bantu, Chantu and Pintu have pets.
Montu says, "If Pintu and I each have a dog, then exactly one of Bantu and Chantu has a dog."
Bantu says, "If Chantu and I each have a cat, then exactly one of Montu and Pintu has a dog."
Chantu says, "If Montu and I each have a dog, then exactly one of Bantu and Pintu has a cat."
Pintu says, "If Bantu and I each have a cat, then exactly one of Bantu and I has a dog."
Only one of the four is telling the truth. Who is telling the truth?
Answer
Bantu is telling the truth.
For a IF-THEN statement to be false, IF part has to be true and THEN part has to be false.
Since only one statement is true and remaining three are false, IF part of three statements are true
& THEN part of one
statement is true. Let's put the given information in table. The pet-name in the normal text
represents the IF part and the petname
in round brackets represents the THEN part.
Montu Bantu Chantu Pintu
Montu says Dog (Dog) (Dog) Dog
Bantu says (Dog) Cat Cat (Dog)
Chantu says Dog (Cat) Dog (Cat)
Pintu says Cat
(Dog)
Cat
(Dog)
It is clear that the IF part of the statements made by Montu, Chantu and Pintu are true as they do
not contradict each other.
.
And the IF part of the statement made by Bantu is false.
Thus, Bantu is telling the truth.
Montu have a Dog and may or may not have a Cat.
Bantu have a Cat.
Chantu have a Dog.
Pintu have a Dog and a Cat.
Three men - Sam, Cam and Laurie - are married to Carrie, Billy and Tina, but not necessarily in
the same order.
Sam's wife and Billy's Husband play Carrie and Tina's husband at bridge. No wife partners her
husband and Cam does not play
bridge.
Who is married to Cam?
Answer
Carrie is married to Cam.
"Sam's wife and Billy's Husband play Carrie and Tina's husband at bridge."
It means that Sam is not married to either Billy or Carrie. Thus, Sam is married to Tina.
As Cam does not play bridge, Billy's husband must be Laurie.
Hence, Carrie is married to Cam.
Let's say that you were a bus driver. At the 1st stop 10 people got on the bus, 2nd stop 3 people got
on the bus and 2 got off, 3rd
stop 23 people got on and 9 got off, 4th stop 53 people got on, 5th stop 30 people got off another
2 people got off and then got
back on, and 4 got on at this bus stop. Now at the last stop before the bus came to its final
destination 29 peolpe got on and 23
people got on.
What was the bus drivers name?
Submitted by : Ruth
Answer
Your Name.
In the beginning of the riddle, it says "Let's say that you were a bus driver." So you are the Bus
Driver and your name is the
answer to this riddle.
An untiring servant it is,
carrying loads across muddy earth.
But one thing that can't be forced,
is a return to the place of its birth.
What it is?
.
Answer
A River
Why can't a man in California marry his widow's sister?
Submitted by : Daniel James
Answer
It is not possible as the man is dead.
In riddle, it is clear that the man's wife is widow that means that he is dead. (Widow means a
woman who's husband is dead.)
And a dead man can not marry a woman, no matter what relation that woman has to his widow or
which country do they
belong.
If the day before two days after the day before tomorrow is Monday, what is today?
Submitted by : Ryan Ellis
Answer
Today is Sunday.
"the day before tomorrow" is today. Hence, the question can be re-written as "If the day before two
days after today is Monday,
what is today?"
Also, "the day before two days after today" is tomorrow. Thus, the question is "If tomorrow is
Monday, what is today?"
Thus, today is Sunday.
There are three bulbs on 19th floor and there are three switches X, Y and Z on the ground floor.
Each switch belongs to one bulbs,
not necessarily in order. You can switch on or off as many times you want but you can go on 19th
floor only once.
How will you find out which swich belongs to which bulb? Note that you are the only person over
there. You can't go outside and
can't use any tools.
Answer
The bulb becomes hot, if you keep it on for some time. This is the characteristics of the bulb and
we can use it to solve the
teaser.
Switch on the switch X and wait for some time say 10 minutes, then switch it off. Now switch on
the switch Y and go up to the
19th floor and check the bulbs.
The bulb which is hot but not lit corresponds to switch X.
The bulb which is lit corresponds to switch Y.
The third bulb which is not lit and is cold corresponds to switch Z.
.
Two men sit down to eat some bread. One man has three loaves and the other has five loaves.
A stranger comes up to them and says that he will pay them if he can share their bread because he
is very hungry.
They all share the bread equally and the stranger is very thankful. He says that he has eight coins of
equal value to divide among
the two men, but he does not know how to divide them.
The man that brought three loaves says that they should split them evenly, four coins each,
because they both shared their bread.
The man that brought five loaves disagrees with him and says that they should split the coins five
for him and three to the man who
brought only three loaves according to the amount of loaves each man brought.
Why are they both wrong, and what is the correct answer?
Answer
Seven for the man that brought five loaves and only one for the man that brought three loaves.
The three men split up the bread evenly i.e. they divided eight loaves by three, or in other words
each man gets eight-thirds of a
loaf.
Since each man got eight-thirds of a loaf, the man that brought five loaves gave up seven-thirds of
his loaves, and the man that
brought three loaves only gave up one-third of ahis loaves.
Each man recieved a coin for each one-third loaf he gave up. Thus, the man that brought five
loaves received seven coins and
only the man that brought three loaves received one coin.
You have 14 apples. Your Friend Marge takes away 3 and gives you 2. You drop 7 but pick up 4.
Bret takes 4 and gives 5. You
take one from Marge and give it to Bret in exchange for 3 more. You give those 3 to Marge and
she gives you an apple and an
orange. Frank comes and takes the apple Marge gave you and gives you a pear. You give the pear
to Bret in exchange for an
apple. Frank then takes an apple from Marge, gives it to Bret for an orange, gives you the orange
for an apple.
How many pears do you have?
Submitted by : Big Mike
Answer
None
Frank gave you a pear in exchange of the apple which Marge gave you. And you gave that pear to
Bret in exchange for an
apple. All the others exchanges involved apples and/or organges.
Substitute digits for the letters to make the following Division true
FIE
-------------
DIE|FASTED
|EDSF
-------------
ILEE
.
AIUI
----------
ESTD
DIE
--------
SNI
you substitute 9 for the letter N, no other letter can be 9 and all other N in the puzzle must be 9.
@ubmitted by : Calon
Answer
L=0, E=1, F=2, T=3, U=4, N=5, @=6, A=7, I=8, D=9 i.e. LEFT UN@AID
It is obvious that E=1, F=2, T=3 and L=0.
Also, D should be 9 as @-D=@. Now everything is simple. I=8, A=7, N=5, @=6 and U=4.
FIE281
------------- -------------
DIE|FA@TED981|276319
|ED@F|1962
------------- -------------
ILEE8011
AIUI7848
---------- ----------
E@TD1639
DIE981
-------- --------
@NI658
In the first One-day International Cricket match between India and England at Lords, the bowling
honours in the Indian team was
shared by Kapil Dev, Madanlal and Binni.
1. Either Kapil took half the wickets or one of the players was run out.
2. Either Kapil took 5 wickets and Binni took 3 or Madanlal took one more than Binni.
3. The sum of Kapil's victims and twice of Madanlal's victims is one more than three times Binni's
victims.
Can you tell the number of wickets each of them took?
Answer
@tatement (3) can be represented as K + 2M = 3B + 1
where,
K - wickets taken by Kapil Dev
M - wickets taken by Madanlal
B - wickets taken by Binni
.
Let's consider statement (2). If Kapil took 5 wickets and Binni took 3 wickets, then from equation
above, Madanlal should have
taken two-and-a-half wickets which is impossible. Hence, Madanlal took one more than Binni i.e.
M=B+1
@ubstitute M = B + 1 in first equation,
K + 2M = 3B + 1
K + 2(B + 1) = 3B + 1
K + 2B + 2 = 3B + 1
K=B-1
Now consider statement (1). If Kapil took half the wickets i.e. 5 wickets, Binni should have taken 6
wickets and Madanlal should
have taken 7 wickets. But this is impossible as there are just 10 wickets. Hence, one player was run
out and total wickets taken
by them must be 9.
K+M+B=9
(B - 1) + (B + 1) + B = 9
B = 3 wickets.
Hence, wickets taken by Kapil, Madanlal and Binni are 2, 4 and 3 respectively.
There are 2 more possible answers as total number of wickets fallen is not specified. In the above
answer, we assumed
maximum wickets i.e. 10.
10 wickets : Kapil=2, Madanlal=4, Binni=3, Runout=1
Aloysius has four different paintings that he wishes to divide among his three children.
How many different ways can he do this if every child must get at least one painting and all four
paintings are different?
@ubmitted by : Lisa
Answer
Paintings can be divided among them in 72 different ways.
It is obvious that two children will get one painting each and the third child will get two paintings.
Thus, first child can get one painting in 4C1 ways.
The second child can get one painting (from remaining 3) in 3C1 ways.
The third child can get two paintings (from remaining 2) in 2C2 ways.
And, these can be divided among them in 3! ways.
Hence, total different ways
= (4C1 * 3C1 * 2C2) * 3!
= (4 * 3 * 1) * 6
= 72 ways
A horse is tied to a five meter rope, six meters away from it was a bail of hay. Without breaking the
rope, the horse was able to get
to the bail of hay.
Answer
The other end of the rope is tied to nothing.
.
There are three errers in the statement of this problem. You must detect all of them to recieve full
credit.
Answer
1. Errors is spelled incorrectly (spelled "errers" in the puzzle).
2. Receive is spelled incorrectly (spelled "recieve" in the puzzle).
3. The third error is that there are only two errors, not three.
If you have it, you want to share it.
If you share it, you don·t have it.
What is it?
@ubmitted by : Esther
Answer
A @ecret
Once you share the secret, you don't have it anymore!!!
If two numbers are respectively 20% and 50% of a third number, what % is the first number of the
second number?
Answer
The first number is 40% of the second number.
Let's assume that the third number is N. Then,
First number = N * (20/100) = N/5
@econd number = N * (50/100) = N/2
Hence, the required answer is
= [(N/5) / (N/2)] * 100
= 40 %
Thus, the first number is 40% of the second number
Consider a state lottery where you get to choose 8 numbers from 1 to 80, no repetiton allowed.
The Lottery Commission chooses
11 from those 80 numbers, again no repetition. You win the lottery if atleast 7 of your numbers are
there in the 11 chosen by the
Lottery Commission.
What is the probablity of winning the lottery?
Answer
.
The probability of winning the lottery is two in one billion i.e. only two person can win from one
billion !!!
Let's find out sample space first. The Lottery Commission chooses 11 numbers from the 80.
Hence, the 11 numbers from the
80 can be selected in 80C11 ways which is very very high and is equal to 1.04776 * 1013
Now, you have to select 8 numbers from 80 which can be selected in 80C8 ways. But we are
interested in only those numbers
which are in 11 numbers selected by the Lottery Commision. There are 2 cases.
You might select 8 numbers which all are there in 11 numbers choosen by the Lottery
Commission. So there are 11C8
ways.
Another case is you might select 7 lucky numbers and 1 non-lucky number from the remaining
69 numbers. There are
( 11C7 ) * ( 69C1 ) ways to do that.
So total lucky ways are
= ( 11C8 ) + ( 11C7 ) * ( 69C1 )
= (165) + (330) * (69)
= 165 + 22770
= 22935
Hence, the probability of the winning lottery is
= (Total lucky ways) / (Total Sample space)
= (22935) / ( 1.04776 * 1013)
= 2.1889 * 10-9
i.e. 2 in a billion.
I was sitting around with my friend Dave, Marty and James recently. I happened to have two tickets
to a new movie in my pocket
that I had just purchased.
I mentioned that there were two four-digit numbers on the tickets and that the sum of all 8 digits
was 25.
Dave asked if any digit appeared more out of the 8, which I answered.
Then, Marty asked if the sum of the digits of either ticket was equal to 13, which I answered too.
Much to my surprise James immediately told me what the two numbers were!
What were they?
Answer
Ticket numbers were 1299 and 1300.
The first thing James realized was that the tickets were consecutively numbered.
There are 4 possible cases:
1. ABCD and ABC(D+1)
2. ABC9 and AB(C+1)0
3. AB99 and A(B+1)00
4. A999 and (A+1)000
If the tickets were numbered ABCD and ABC(D+1) and my answer to Marty's question had been
"YES", the only conclusion
James could have reached would have been that A+B+C+D=12, and regardless of my answer to
Dave's question there would
not have been a unique solution. So my answer to Marty's question must have been "NO". It
follows that the tickets could not
have been numbered in this manner.
If the numbers were ABC9 and AB(C+1)0, we would have 2A+2B+2C+10=25, and so
2(A+B+C)=15, which is impossible.
If the numbers were AB99 and A(B+1)00, we would have 2A+2B+19=25 or A+B=3, leading to the
four possibilities (0399 and
0400), (1299 and 1300), (2199 and 2200), (3099 and 3100). Of these, three of them would have
had me answer "YES" to
Dave's question (if any digit appeared more?), and only the pair (1299 and 1300) would have had
me answer "NO". It follows
that these were my ticket numbers i.e. (1299 and 1300)
.
Similarly, if the numbers were A999 and (A+1)000, we would have 2A + 28 = 25, which is again
impossible.
Thus, my ticket numbers were 1299 and 1300.
Can you clock the boiling of an egg for seven minutes, with a 9-minutes, 11-minutes and 14-
minutes hourglass?
If yes, then within how many minutes you can do this?
Answer
Method I: 16 minutes
Start all the hourglasses together. When the sand stops running in the 9-minute hourglass, the 11-
minute hourglass will have 2
minutes remaining whereas the 14-minute hourglass will have 5 minutes remaining. Now, turn the
14-minute horglass on its
side and simultaneously drop the egg. When the sand stops running in 11-minute hourglass,
straighten the 14-minute
hourglass. Thus, the whole process takes just 16 minutes.
Method II: 18 minutes
Start all the hourglasses together. When the sand stops running in the 9-minute hourglass, turn the
14-minute hourglass over.
When the sand stops running in 11-minute hourglass, turn again the 14-minute hourglass and
simultaneously drop the egg.
When the sand stops in the 14-minute hourglass, seven minutes will have elapsed. Thus, the whole
process takes 18 minutes.
Arnold bought a brand new car with one extra tyre. Each tyre can sustain for maximum of 1200
kms.
If all the tyres were used equally, how far can the car travel?
Answer
The car can travel for 1500 kms.
There are total 5 tyres and each tyre can sustain for maximum of 1200 kms. Thus, total 6000 kms.
But a car uses 4 tyres at a
time, hence the car can travel for 6000/4 = 1500 kms.
This can be achieved by rotating the tires every 300 kms.
Doo-Bee-Doo had born on 1468 B.C. He had lived one-fourth of his life as a boy, one-third of his
life as a youth, one-fifth of his life
as a man and the remaining 52 years as an old man.
Which year did Doo-Bee-Doo die?
Answer
Doo-Bee-Doo died in 1228 B.C.
Let's assume that Doo-Bee-Doo's age was N years when he died.
(life as a boy) + (life as a youth) + (life as a man) + (life as an old man) = (total life)
(N/4) + (N/3) + (N/5) + 52 = N
15N + 20N + 12N + 52*60 = 60N
.
13N = 52*60
N = 240 years
Thus, Doo-Bee-Doo was 240 years old, when he died. As he born in 1468 B.C., he died in (1468-
240) 1228 B.C.
In the following multiplication, certain digits have been replaced with asterisks (*). Replace all the
asterisks such that the problem
holds the result.
**7
X3**
----------
*0*3
*1*
*5*
-------------
*7**3
Answer
A simple one.
117
X319
----------
1053
117
351
-------------
37323
The cricket match between India and Pakistan was over.
Harbhajan scored more runs than Ganguly.
Sachin scored more runs than Laxman but less than Dravid
Badani scored as much runs as Agarkar but less than Dravid and more than Sachin.
Ganguly scored more runs than either Agarkar or Dravid.
Each batsman scored 10 runs more than his immediate batsman. The lowest score was 10 runs.
How much did each one of them
score?
Answer
.
A simple one. Use the given facts and put down all the players in order. The order is as follow with
Harbhajan, the highest
scorer and Laxman, the lowest scorer.
1. Harbhajan
2. Ganguly
3. Dravid
4. Badani, Agarkar
5. Sachin
6. Laxman
Also, as the lowest score was 10 runs. Laxman must have scored 10, Sachin 20, Badani & Agarkar
30 and so on.
1. Harbhajan - 60 runs
2. Ganguly - 50 runs
3. Dravid - 40 runs
4. Badani, Agarkar - 30 runs each
5. Sachin - 20 runs
6. Laxman - 10 runs
Which of the following day(s) can't be the last day of a century?
Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday
Justify your answer.
Answer
The last day of a century can not be Tuesday, Thursday or Saturday.
A normal year has 365 days whereas a leap year has 366 days. Every year which is divisible by 4 is
called a leap year. Also,
every 4th century is a leap year but no other century is a leap year.
1 normal year = 365 days = 52 weeks + 1 day
1 leap year = 366 days = 52 weeks + 2 day
Thus, a normal year has 1 odd day whereas a leap year has 2 odd days.
100 years
= 76 normal years + 24 leap years
= 76*[52 weeks + 1 day] + 24*[52 weeks + 2 day]
= (76*52) weeks + 76 days + (24*52) weeks + 48 days
= 5200 weeks + 124 days
= 5217 weeks + 5 days
i.e. 100 years contain 5 odd days
Similarly,
200 years contain 10 odd days i.e. 3 odd days.
300 years contain 15 odd days i.e. 1 odd days.
400 years contain (20+1) odd days i.e. 0 odd days.
Note that 400 years contain one more leap year.
Also, we have Sunday for 0 odd day, Monday for 1 odd day, Tuesday for 2 odd days, and so on...
Thus, last day of first century is Friday. (5 odd days)
Last day of second century is Wednesday. (3 odd days)
Last day of third century is Monday. (1 odd days)
Last day of forth century is Sunday. (0 odd days)
Since the order is repeating in successive cycles, the last day of a century can not be Tuesday,
Thursday or Saturday.
.
The 8" pizza sells for $4.99 at my favorite pizza store. The store claims they have a great deal on
the large 12" pizza, which is
specially priced at $9.54.
What is the per cent discount the store is offering?
Answer
The store is offering 15% discount.
The small pizza has a diameter of 8" and therefore an area equal to PI*4*4.
The large pizza has a diameter of 12" and therefore an area equal to PI*6*6.
If the pizzas are priced in accordance with their areas, then
Price of large pizza / Price of small pizza = (6 * 6) / (4 * 4) = 2.25
Price of large pizza = 2.25 x 4.99 = 11.23
Thus, discount on large pizza = [1 - (9.54 / 11.23)] x 100 = 15 %
Spike is taking a series of exams. It turns out that he'll have to score a 97 on the last one in order to
average 90 for the entire
series. But even if he scores as low as a 73, he'll still average an 87.
How many exams are there in the series?
Answer
There are total 8 exams.
Let S be the sum of all of his exam scores before the final, and let there be a total of N exams.
Then we have,
(S + 97) / N = (S + 73) / N + 3
S + 97 = S + 73 + 3N
3N = 24
N=8
Thus, there are total 8 exams.
In general, if a difference of X points on the final exam corresponds to a difference of Y points in
the overall average, then there
are X/Y exams in total.
There is a cabin on the top of a mountin. There are many people dead inside. They are the only
once-living creatures in the cabin.
All of the windows and doors are sealed, and there is no human life around for hundreds of miles.
There is no way to reach the
cabin by car or foot, there are dense woods and dangerous wild animals in the area.
How did they get there?
Submitted by : Laura
Answer
The cabin is the cabin of an aeroplane.
.
The aeroplane crashed on the mountain, and all the people inside died. There is no other
possibility as teaser says "all of the
windows and doors are sealed, there is no human life around for hundreds of miles, there is no
way to reach the cabin by car or
foot, there are dense woods and dangerous wild animals in the area."
It is also possible that someone dropped them there from aeroplane or helicopter and due to
some reasons they died inside the
cabin. But the first answer looks much more satisfactory.
There are N secret agents each know a different piece of secret information. They can telephone
each other and exchange all the
information they know. After the telephone call, they both know anything that either of them knew
before the call.
What are the minimum number of telephone calls needed so that all of the them know
everything?
Answer
(2N - 3) telephone calls, for N = 2,3
(2N - 4) telephone calls, for N > 3
Divide the N secret agents into two groups. If N is odd, one group will contain one extra agent.
Consider first group: agent 1 will call up agent 2, agent 2 will call up agent 3 and so on. Similarly in
second group, agent 1 will
call up agent 2, agent 2 will call up agent 3 and so on. After (N - 2) calls, two agents in each the
group will know anything that
anyone knew in his group, say they are Y1 & Y2 from group 1 and Z1 & Z2 from group 2.
Now, Y1 will call up Z1 and Y2 will call up Z2. Hence, in next two calls total of 4 agents will know
everything.
Now (N - 4) telephone calls are reqiured for remaining (N - 4) secret agents.
Total telephone calls require are
= (N - 2) + 2 + (N - 4)
= 2N - 4
Let\'s take an example. Say there are 4 secret agents W, X, Y & Z. Divide them into two groups of
2 each i.e. (W, X) and (Y, Z).
Here, 4 telephone calls are required.
1. W will call up X.
2. Y will call up Z.
3. W, who knows WX will call up Y, who knows YZ.
4. X, who knows WX will call up Z, who knows YZ.
Take an another example. Say there are 5 secret agents J, K, L, M & N. Divide them into two
groups i.e. (J, K) and (L, M, N).
Here, 6 telephone calls are required.
1. J will call up K.
2. L will call up M.
3. M will call up N. Now M and N know LMN.
4. J, who knows JK will call up M, who knows LMN.
5. K, who knows JK will call up N, who knows LMN.
6. L will call up to anyone of four.
At the party there were 19 females, 12 males, 14 adults and 17 children. Then I arrived and the
number of different man-woman
couples possible became equal to the number of boy-girl couples possible.
Who am I - a man, a woman, a boy or a girl?
Note that if there were 9 boys and 8 girls at the party, then there would have been 72 (9x8) boy-girl
couples possible.
.
Answer
I am a Girl and there were 9 men, 5 women, 3 boys and 14 girls before I arrived at the party.
Before I arrived, let M be the number of male adults (men) at the party.
Then, the number of female adults (women) = 14 - M
The number of boys = 12 - M
The number of girls = 5 + M
Now, I arrived at the party and I am either a man or a woman or a boy or a girl. Let's consider
each case one-by-one.
Case I: Let's assume that I am a Man. It is given that after I arrived, the number of different man-
woman couples possible
became equal to the number of boy-girl couples possible. Hence,
(M + 1) * (14 - M) = (12 - M) * (5 + M)
14M - M2 + 14 - M = 60 + 12M - 5M - M2
13M + 14 = 60 + 7M
6M = 46
This is impossible as the value of M must be integer.
Case II: Let's assume that I am a woman, then the equation is
(M) * (15 - M) = (12 - M) * (5 + M)
15M - M2 = 60 + 12M - 5M - M2
15M = 60 + 7M
8M = 60
This is also impossible as the value of M must be integer.
Case III: Let's assume that I am a boy, then the equation is
(M) * (14 - M) = (13 - M) * (5 + M)
14M - M2 = 65 + 13M - 5M - M2
14M = 65 + 6M
8M = 65
This is also impossible as the value of M must be integer.
Case IV: Let's assume that I am a girl, then the equation is
(M) * (14 - M) = (12 - M) * (6 + M)
14M - M2 = 72 + 12M - 6M - M2
14M = 72 + 6M
8M = 72
M=9
Thus, I am a Girl and there were 9 men, 5 women, 3 boys and 14 girls before I arrived at the
party.
THE WIZARDS PROBLEM
The old wizard of Wallapoo lived alone in a tall tower on a hilltop. One day, he decided to take a
bath.
The bathroom was at the very top of the tower. It was a small room, with only one door and no
windows. The walls, floor and ceiling
were made of stone.
The wizard got into the tub and turned on the water. Just then his cat chased a mouse, past the
door. The cat bumped into the door
and it swung shut with a thump. The bump jarred the latch, and the wizard heard it click. He was
locked in the bathroom!
Angrily, the wizard turned off the faucet - and the handle broke off in his hand. Water continued
to pour out of the faucet. There was
no way to shut it off. Slowly the water begun to fill the bathtub. The wizard knew that in time the
whole room would be filled with
.
water - and he couldnt get out. How did the wizard keep from drowning?
(AND REMEMBER HE DIDNT USE MAGIC)
Submitted by : Clinton Carpenter
Answer
The Wizard should pull out the plug of the bathtub so that the water can drain out. By doing so he
will save himself from
drowning, but he will be still locked inside the bathroom !!!
What is the four-digit number in which the first digit is 1/3 of the second, the third is the sum of
the first and second, and the last is
three times the second?
Submitted by : Dan Allen
Answer
The 4 digit number is 1349.
It is given that the first digit is 1/3 of the second. There are 3 such possibilities.
1. 1 and 3
2. 2 and 6
3. 3 and 9
Now, the third digit is the sum of the first and second digits.
1. 1 + 3 = 4
2. 2 + 6 = 8
3. 3 + 9 = 12
It is clear that option 3 is not possible. So we are left with only two options. Also, the last digit is
three times the second, which
rules out the second option. Hence, the answer is 1349.
You have 3 points labelled A, B and C. You then have another 3 points labelled 1, 2 and 3. The
aim of the puzzle is to connect
point A with point 1, 2 and 3. Point B with point 1, 2 and 3 and point C with point 1, 2 and 3.
Now while connecting the points you have to follow one rule - the lines cannot cross over each
other.
ABC
123
PS : You can arrange the points in order as long as the lines DO NOT cross over each other.
Sumitted y : Pingu
.
Answer
There is no solution to it, if you consider 2 dimensions. It is impossile to join each of points A, B
and C with points 1, 2 and 3
without lines crossing each other.
There is solution, if you consider 3 dimensions. Consider a circular ase and a line perpendicular
to it passing from the center.
Now take any 3 points along the perimeter of the circular ase as points 1, 2 and 3. Similarly take
any 3 points along the
perpendicular line as points A, B and C. Now it is quite simple to join each of points A, B and C
with points 1, 2 and 3 without
any of the lines crossing each other.
The other possile 3D structure is Pyramid. Take points 1, 2 and 3 as a vertices of the triangular
ase and points A, B and C
along the height of the Pyramid which is perpendicular to the triangular ase and passing through
the apex.
On one side of the river there is a man, a wolf, a goat, and some caage. The man needs to take
each of them across to the other
side of the river. He has a oat, ut in it he can only fit one of them as well as himself.
If he takes the wolf across first, the goat will eat the caage. If he takes the caage across, the
wolf will eat the goat.
Write the correct order in which he can take them across.
Sumitted y : Tania
Answer
There are two answers to the teaser, similar ut slightly different. The key is never keep Wolf-Goat
and Goat-Caage alone.
Initially, the man, the wolf, the goat and the caage is on one side of the river i.e. (MWGC, 0)
Answer : 1
1. Take the goat across leaving the wolf and the caage. (WC, MG)
2. Come ack. (WCM, G)
3. Take the caage across leaving the wolf alone. (W, MGC)
4. Take the goat ack. (MWG, C)
5. Take the wolf across. (G, MWC)
6. Come ack. (MG, WC)
7. Take the goat across. (0, MWGC)
Answer : 2
1. Take the goat across leaving the wolf and the cabbage. (WC, MG)
2. Come back. (WCM, G)
3. Take the wolf across leaving the wolf alone. (C, MWG)
4. Take the goat back. (MGC, W)
5. Take the cabbage across. (G, MWC)
6. Come back. (MG, WC)
7. Take the goat across. (0, MWGC)
A man is walking along a level road lit only by a single streetlight. He is moving in a straight line, at
a constant speed.
He passes the lamppost and leaves it behind, which makes his shadow lengthen.
Does the top of the man's shadow move faster, slower or at the same speed as the man? Justify
your answer.
Answer
.
The top of the shadow moves faster than the man.
Let A be the position of the man at one point in time and B be the position after he walked some
distance. Also, let AA and BB
be the corresponding positions of the top of his shadow. It is clear from the diagram that the
distance AA-BB is greater than
distance A-B. Hence, the top of the shadow moves faster.
Mr. Khemani have a triangular, Royal Blue colored dining table in his house. The three sides of
the table are 13, 17 and 43 inches
long respectively. He wants to change the color of the table to Olive Green. According to the
painter, 50ml of paint per square inch
of the table is required for that.
How much paint is required to change the color of the table to Olive Green?
Answer
A trick question.
A triangular table with sides 13, 17 and 43 inches does not exist. It is impossible to have such a
triangle.
Summation of any two sides of the triangle should be greater than the third side. It is true for any
type of triangle. The
dimension of the table is 13, 17 and 43, where 13 + 17 < 43. Hence such table does not exist and
no need to paint it.
Sarika multiplied 414 by certain number and obtained 69958 as the answer. But she found that
there is some error in the answer -
both the 9s in the answer are wrong and all the other digits are correct.
Can you find the correct answer?
Answer
The correct answer is 60858.
If you divide 69958 by 414, you will get 168.98. Hence, assume some three digit number and
multiply it by 414 and use 6**58
as the answer.
Assume three digit number such that
***
414
-------------
.
***
***0
***00
-------------
6**58
It is obvious that the last digit of the assumed number must be 7.
**7
414
-------------
**8
**70
**800
-------------
6**58
Now, the second last digit of the assumed number must be 4 or 9. Also, the first digit of the
assumed number must be 1 as the
first digit of the answer is 6. Using trial and error for above two conditions, the answer is
147
414
-------------
588
1470
58800
-------------
60858
There was a man who bought lots of bunches of bananas at $3 each and sold them on for $2. In
doing so he became a millionaire.
@ m : Ls M
rs

A swr
A rck r.
Th ma was a
ar f
r h sar a a a s ss a w
w
a m
ar.
Bra Tasr N
: 00420
Exam h f

w g sq c
f mrs.
1
11
21
1211
.
111221
312211
13112221
1113213211
31131211131221
Wha ar h x w
mrs h gv srs?
A swr
Th x w
mrs ar 13211311123113112211 a 11131221133112132113212221.
Each mr s a a scrp

f h prv
s mr.
@c
mr scrs frs mr as

.. 11
Thr mr scrs sc
mr as w

s .. 21
F
rh mr scrs hr mr as
w
,

.. 1211
Ffh mr scrs f
rh mr as

,
w
, w

s .. 111221
@xh mr scrs ffh mr as hr
s, w
w
s,

.. 312211
F

w g h sam, h x
w mrs ar 13211311123113112211 a
11131221133112132113212221.
Bra Tasr N
: 00421
A ma s a a rvr wh a 9 ga
ck a a 4 ga
ck. H s xac 6 ga
s
f
war.
H
w ca h s
h cks
g xac 6 ga
s
f war?
N
ha h ca
sma mp g s
m
f h war

f h 9 ga
ck
r h 4
ga
ck.
@ m : A rw
A swr
F
r h sack
f xpa a
, 's f 4 ga
ck as B ck P a 9 ga
ck as
B ck Q.
Opra

4 ga
ck
(B ck P)
9 ga
ck
(Bucket Q)
Initially 0 0
Fill the bucket Q with 9 gallon water 0 9
Pour 4 gallon water from bucket Q to bucket P 4 5
Empty bucket P 0 5
Empty bucket P 0 1
Fill the bucket Q with 9 gallon water 1 9
9 gallon bucket contains 6 gallon of water, as required.
.
01121213221312241313221???
Answer
The next three numbers are 4, 2 and 2
The pattern is - the number of factors in prime factorization of positive integers. Note that all
prime number positions are 1 in
the given series.
Number Prime Factorization Factors in Prime Factorization
110
221
331
4 2*2 2
551
6 2*3 2
771
8 2*2*2 3
9 3*3 2
10 2*5 2
Thus, the next few numbers in the given series are:
4 2 2 3 3 1 3 1 5 2 2 2 4 1 2 2 4 1 3 1 3 3 2 1 5 2 3 2 3 1 4 2 4 2 2 1 ...
Note that 1 is neither a Prime number nor a Composite number.
There is a Green house.
Inside the Green house, there is a White house.
Inside the White house, there is a Red house.
Inside the Red house there are lots of Black babies.
What am I?
@ubmitted by : Gene W Cole @r
Answer
A Watermelon
It is Green from outside (skin).
Then there is White shell inside.
Then there is Red flesh inside.
And Black seeds inside.
Mr. X wants to send Diamond Necklace to his fiancee Y who lives in some other country. Mr. X
puts the Diamond Necklace inside a
box to parcel. Note that:
.
1. The parcel must be locked.
2. The box is made up of such a material that nobody can break it.
3. The box has a handle large enough to put a lock on it.
4. Mr. X can not send a key with the parcel.
5. Combination locks and telephones are not available.
How will Mr. X send Diamond Necklace to his fiancee Y?
Answer
Mr. X and his fiancee Y will follow the following steps.
1. Mr. X will put Diamond Necklace inside a box and will lock it.
2. He will send the parcel to his fiancee Y, without the key.
3. Y will put her lock on it and will send box back to Mr. X.
4. Mr. X will remove his lock and will send the box back to Y.
5. Y will remove her lock and will receive the Necklace.
Mr. Desai lives at 20, Dabba Street with his wife Shirin. They have have nine sons and each son
has one sister.
How many members are in Mr. Desai's family?
Answer
There are total 12 members in Mr. Desai's family. Mr. Desai and his wife Shirin, nine sons and
one daughter.
Mr. Desai do not have 9 daughters. There is only one daughter and she is the only sister. If there
are 9 daughters, then each
son will have 9 sisters and not just a one.
rain Teaser No : 00432
Tanya wants to go on a date and prefers her date to be tall, dark and handsome.
1. Of the preferred traits - tall, dark and handsome - no two of Adam, Bond, Cruz and Dumbo
have the same number.
2. Only Adam or Dumbo is tall and fair.
3. Only Bond or Cruz is short and handsome.
4. Adam and Cruz are either both tall or both short.
5. Bond and Dumbo are either both dark or both fair.
Who is Tanya's date?
Answer
Cruz is Tanya's date.
As no two of them have the same number of preferred traits - from (1), exactly one of them has
none of the preferred traits
and exactly one of them has all the preferred traits.
From (4) and (5), there are only two possibilities:
* Adam & Cruz both are tall and Bond & Dumbo both are fair.
* Adam & Cruz both are short and Bond & Dumbo both are dark.
But from (2), second possibility is impossible. So the first one is the correct possibility i.e. Adam &
Cruz both are tall and
Bond & Dumbo both are fair.
Then from (3), Bond is short and handsome.
.
Also, from (1) and (2), Adam is tall and fair. Also, Dumbo is the person without any preferred
traits. Cruz is Dark. Adam and
Cruz are handsome. Thus, following are the individual preferred traits:
Cruz - Tall, Dark and Handsome
Adam - Tall and Handsome
Bond - Handsome
Dumbo - None :-(
Hence, Cruz is Tanya's date.
Annie, Bunnie, Candy and Dina visited Edy on 14th February.
1. The time of each visit was as follows:
- Annie at 8:00
- Bunnie at 9:00
- Candy at 10:00
- Dina at 11:00
Each time mentioned above may be either AM or PM.
2. Candy did not visit Edy between Bunnie and Dina.
3. At least one female visited Edy between Annie and Bunnie.
4. Annie did not visit Edy before both Candy and Dina.
Can you tell at what time did they individually visit Edy?
Answer
Bunnie (9:00AM) - Dina (11:00AM) - Annie (8:00PM) - Candy (10:00PM)
From the given data, it is clear that at least one female visited Edy in the morning and at least one
female visited Edy in the
evening. Also, from (4), Annie did not visit Edy first. It means that Annie visited Edy at 8:00 PM
From (3), Bunnie must have visited Edy at 9:00 AM. Also, either Candy or Dina or both visited
Edy in the morning.
But from (2), only Dina must have visited Edy in the morning at 11:00 AM and hence, Candy
visited Edy at 10:00 PM.
The order of visits must be:
Bunnie (9:00AM) - Dina (11:00AM) - Annie (8:00PM) - Candy (10:00PM)
11212231223233412232334233?
Answer
The next three numbers in the series are 4, 3, 4.
The pattern is - the number of 1's in the binary expansion of the positive integers starting from 1.
Number Binary Equivalent # of 1's
111
2 10 1
3 11 2
.
4 100 1
5 101 2
6 110 2
7 111 3
8 1000 1
9 1001 2
10 1010 2
11 1011 3
12 1100 2
13 1101 3
14 1110 3
15 1111 4
16 10000 1
17 10001 2
18 10010 2
19 10011 3
20 10100 2
21 10101 3
22 10110 3
23 10111 4
24 11000 2
25 11001 3
26 11010 3
27 11011 4
28 11100 3
29 11101 4
The other way of looking at it is - break up the series into lines as follow:
1
12
1223
12232334
1223233423343445
A new line can be created by writing previous line followed by the previous line with 1 added to
each number.
Four friends - Arjan, Bhuvan, Guran and Lakha were comparing the number of sheep that they
owned.
It was found that Guran had ten more sheep than Lakha.
If Arjan gave one-third to Bhuvan, and Bhuvan gave a quarter of what he then held to Guran, who
then passed on a fifth of his
holding to Lakha, they would all have an equal number of sheep.
How many sheep did each of them possess? Give the minimal possible answer.
Answer
.
Arjan, Bhuvan, Guran and Lakha had 90, 50, 55 and 45 sheep respectively.
Assume that Arjan, Bhuvan, Guran and Lakha had A, B, G and L sheep respectively. As it is given
that at the end each would
have an equal number of sheep, comparing the final numbers from the above table.
Arjan's sheep = Bhuvan's sheep
2A/3 = A/4 + 3B/4
8A = 3A + 9B
5A = 9B
Arjan's sheep = Guran's sheep
2A/3 = A/15 + B/5 + 4G/5
2A/3 = A/15 + A/9 + 4G/5 (as B=5A/9)
30A = 3A + 5A + 36G
22A = 36G
11A = 18G
Arjan's sheep = Lakha's sheep
2A/3 = A/60 + B/20 + G/5 + L
2A/3 = A/60 + A/36 + 11A/90 + L (as B=5A/9 and G=11A/18)
2A/3 = A/6 + L
A/2 = L
A = 2L
Also, it is given that Guran had ten more sheep than Lakha.
G = L + 10
11A/18 = A/2 + 10
A/9 = 10
A = 90 sheep
Thus, Arjan had 90 sheep, Bhuvan had 5A/9 i.e. 50 sheep, Guran had 11A/18 i.e. 55 sheep and
Lakha had A/2 i.e. 45 sheep.
The last years top-6 employees of Marketing Department were (1) Anand, (2) Bhavin, (3) Chetan,
(4) Divya, (5) Ekta, (6) Florance.
The highest ranking is 1 and the lowest ranking is 6.
Current years top-6 employees are the same, but all ranked in different positions from that of the
last year. The following facts are
known:
1. Bhavin's change in ranking is the greatest of the six.
2. The product of Divya's ranking for the two years is the same as the product of Florance's ranking
for the two years.
What are the new rankings?
Answer
(1) Chetan, (2) Anand, (3) Ekta, (4) Florance, (5) Bhavin, (6) Divya
.
From (2), there are two possibilities
1. Divya's ranking changed from 4 to 3 and Florance's ranking changed from 6 to 2.
2. Divya's ranking changed from 4 to 6 and Florance's ranking changed from 6 to 4.
Bhavin's ranking could not have changed by more than 4. But in case of (a), Florance's change in
ranking would have been by
4. Hence, contradiction of fact (1). Hence, Divya's ranking changed from 4 to 6 and Florance's
ranking changed from 6 to 4.
Since Bhavin's change in ranking is the greatest of the six, his ranking changed by 3 i.e. from 2 to 5
and Ekta's ranking
changed to 3. Also, as all the ranking changed, Anand's new ranking must be 2 and Chetan on the
top.
Thus, top-6 employees of the year are (1) Chetan, (2) Anand, (3) Ekta, (4) Florance, (5) Bhavin, (6)
Divya
Adam, Burzin, Clark and Edmund each live in an apartment. Their apartments are arranged in a
row numbered 1 to 4 from left to
right. Also, one of them is the landlord.
1. If Clark's apartment is not next to Burzin's apartment, then the landlord is Adam and lives in
apartment 1.
2. If Adam's apartment is right of Clark's apartment, then the landlord is Edmund and lives in
apartment 4.
3. If Burzin's apartment is not next to Edmund's apartment, then the landlord is Clark and lives in
apartment 3.
4. If Edmund's apartment is right of Adam's apartment, then the landlord is Burzin and lives in
apartment 2.
Who is the landlord?
Answer
Clark is the landlord.
Assume each statement true, one at a time and see that no other statement is contradicted.
Let's assume that Statement (1) is true. Then, Adam is the landlord and lives in apartment 1. Also,
other three's apartments will
be on the right of his apartment - which contradicts Statement (4) i.e. If Edmund's apartment is
right of Adam's apartment, then
the landlord is Burzin. Thus, Adam is not the landlord.
Let's assume that Statement (2) is true. Then, Edmund is the landlord and lives in apartment 4.
Also, other three's apartments
will be on the left of his apartment - which again contradicts Statement (4) i.e. If Edmund's
apartment is right of Adam's
apartment, then the landlord is Burzin. Thus, Edmund is not the landlord either.
Let's assume that Statement (3) is true. Then, Clark is the landlord and lives in apartment 3. It
satisfies all the statements for
(1) Adam - (2) Edmund - (3) Clark - (4) Burzin
Hence, Clark is the landlord.
Similarly, you can assume Statement (4) true and find out that it also contradicts.
You are given an arbitrarily long string of parentheses i.e. a string comprising of '(' and ')'.
Give an efficient way of finding whether a given string contains a balanced parentheses or not. Note
that the string can be of any
length.
A string with balanced parentheses is a string containing same number of left parentheses '(' and
right parentheses ')'. Also, they
must be in correct order i.e. ( ( ) ( ) ) is balanced whereas ( ) ) ( ( ) is not.
.
Answer
Start a counter with 0 and read the given string from left to right. Add 1 for each left parentheses
and subtract 1 for each right
parentheses.
If count is negative at any time, the given string is not balanced.
If the final count is non-zero, the given string is not balanced.
If the final count is zero, the given string is balanced.
Silu and Meenu were walking on the road.
Silu said, "I weigh 51 Kgs. How much do you weigh?"
Meenu replied that she wouldn't reveal her weight directly as she is overweight. But she said, "I
weigh 29 Kgs plus half of my
weight."
How much does Meenu weigh?
Answer
Meenu weighs 58 Kgs.
It is given that Meenu weighs 29 Kgs plus half of her own weight. It means that 29 Kgs is the other
half. So she weighs 58 Kgs.
Solving mathematically, let's assume that her weight is X Kgs.
X = 29 + X/2
2*X = 58 + X
X = 58 Kgs
Dr. DoLittle always goes walking to the clinic and takes the same time while going and while
coming back. One day he noticed
something.
When he left the home, the hour hand and the minute hand were exactly opposite to each other
and when he reached the clinic,
they were together.
Similarly, when he left the clinic, the hour hand and the minute hand were together and when he
reached the home, they were
exactly opposite to each other.
How much time does Dr. DoLittle take to reach home from the clinic? Give the minimal possible
answer.
Answer
32 minutes 43.6 seconds
In twelve hours, the minute hand and the hour hand are together for 11 times. It means that after
every 12/11 hours, both the
hands are together.
Similarly in twelve hours, the minute hand and the hour hand are exactly opposite to each other
for 11 times. It means that after
every 12/11 hours, both the hands are opposite.
Now, let's take an example. We know that at 12 both the hands are together and at 6 both the
hands are exactly opposite to
each other.
.
After 6, both the hands are in opposition at [6+(12/11)] hours, [6+2*(12/11)] hours, [6+3*(12/11)]
hours and so on. The sixth
such time is [6+6*(12/11)] hours which is the first time after 12. Thus after 12, both the hands are
opposite to each other at
12:32:43.6
Hence, Dr. DoLittle takes 32 minutes and 43.6 seconds to reach home from the clinic.
How many birthdays does an average man have?
@ubmitted by : Dan Johnson
Answer
One
All of us have only one birthday as we are born only once. If my date of birth is 14th November,
that is the only birthday I have.
How can anybody have more than one birthdays?
Yesterday in a party, I asked Mr. @hah his birthday. With a mischievous glint in his eyes he
replied. "The day before yesterday I
was 83 years old and next year I will be 86."
Can you figure out what is the Date of Birth of Mr. @hah? Assume that the current year is 2000.
Answer
Mr. @hah's date of birth is 31 December, 1915
Today is 1 January, 2000. The day before yesterday was 30 December, 1999 and Mr. @hah was 83
on that day. Today i.e. 1
January, 2000 - he is 84. On 31 December 2000, he will be 85 and next year i.e. 31 December,
2001 - he will be 86. Hence, the
date of birth is 31 December, 1915.
Many people do think of Leap year and date of birth as 29th February as 2000 is the Leap year
and there is difference of 3
years in Mr. @hah's age. But that is not the answer.
Two rockets are launched simultaneously from two different positions such that Rocket X will land
at the same spot from which
Rocket Y was launched, and Rocket Y will land at the same spot from which Rocket X was
launched, allowing a small distance to
the left or right to avoid the mid-air collision.
The rockets are launched from the same angle, and hence travel the same distance vertically as
well as horizontally. If the rockets
reach their destinations in 1 and 9 hours respectively after passing each other, how much faster is
one rocket from the other?
Answer
The faster rocket is going 3 times as fast as the slower rocket.
Note that the distance covered by one rocket before they met is same as the distance covered by
other rocket after they met.
Let's assume that Vx and Vy are the velocity of the Rocket X and Rocket Y respectively, and T be
the time before they met.
Also, assume that the Rocket X was the slower.
Distance covered by Rocket X before they met = Distance covered by Rocket Y after they met
.
Vx * T = Vy * 1
T = Vy/Vx
Distance covered by Rocket X after they met = Distance covered by Rocket Y before they met
Vx * 9 = Vy * T
T = 9Vx/Vy
Thus,
Vy/Vx = 9Vx/Vy
Vy * Vy = 9 * Vx * Vx
Vy = 3 * Vx
Thus, the faster rocket is going 3 times as fast as the slower rocket.
B, J and P are related to each other.
1. Among the three are B's legal spouse, J's sibling and P's sister-in-law.
2. B's legal spouse and J's sibling are of the same sex.
Who is the married man?
Answer
J is the married man.
Note that a person's sister-in-law may be the wife of that person's brother or the sister of that
person's spouse.
There are 2 cases:
1. If B's legal spouse is J, then J's sibling must be P and P's sister-in-law must be B.
2. If B's legal spouse is P, then P's sister-in-law must be J and J's sibling must be B.
It is given that B's legal spouse and J's sibling are of the same sex. Also, it is obvious that P's sister-
in-law is female. Then, B's
legal spouse and J's sibling both must be males.
B's spouse J's sibling P's sister-in-law
(male) (male) (female)
------------------------------------------------------
Case I J P B
Case II P B J
Case II is not possible as B & P are married to each other and both are male. Hence, J is the
married man.
A series comprising of numbers contains only ten digits. The first eight digits in the given series are
6, 2, 5, 5, 4, 5, 6, 3
Can you find out the remaining two digits?
.
Answer
The remaining two digits are 7 and 6.
The pattern is - the number of segments on a standard calculator/LCD display it takes to represent
the digits starting with 0.
________
| | | _| _| |_| |_ |_ | |_| |_|
|_| | |_ _| | _| |_| | |_| _|
There are two vehicles, a car and a train, heading towards the same rail crossing. (where a road
intersects with the tracks)
Both are travelling at a constant speed of 70mph, and both are at the same distance from the
crossing. Neither vehicle changes
course or alters its speed. Yet there is no collision and no accident of any kind.
Why not?
@ubmitted by : Kace
Answer
A tricky one.
The train was moving towards crossing and the car was on the train in the stationary state i.e. not
moving. As the car was on
the train and the train was moving, both were travelling at the same speed and were at the same
distance from the crossing at
any given time. @o no chance of collision.
Another possibility is - they were headed towards the same rail crossing, but they actually didn't
cross each other. They were
running parallel.
How many months have 29 days in year 2000?
Which month(s)?
@ubmitted by : A@HLEY
Answer
All 12 months have 29 days in year 2000.
The question is how many months have 29 days and not EXACTLY 29 days. Hence, all the
months in year 2000 have 29 days
i.e. January(31), Febuary(29), March(31), April(30), May(31), June(30), July(31), August(31),
@eptember(30), October(31),
November(30), December(31)
The WWE tournament was about to begin where each participant would compete against every
other participant.
At the last moment, some new participants appeared and asked that they be allowed to fight in the
competition. Because of them,
26 more competitions had to be scheduled.
How many new participants were there?
.
Answer
There were 4 new participants.
Let's assume that there were N participants initially. Then, total number of competitions are N*(N-
1)/2
Again, assume that there were X new participants. Then total number of competitions are
(N+X)*(N+X-1)/2
But it is given that the difference between them is 26.
(N+X) * (N+X-1) / 2 - N * (N-1) / 2 = 26
X * (2*N + X - 1) = 52
Since, both N and X are positive integers, there are two possible answers (5, 4) and (26, 1). But it is
clear that there were more
than one new participants. Hence, the only possible values of (N, X) are (5, 4).
Hence, there were 4 new participants.
Buffalo produces 10 pounds of milk daily, a cow produces 1 pound of milk daily, and sheep
produce 1/4 pound of milk daily.
I need exactly 100 pounds of milk from exactly 100 different animals daily. Also, I should use all 3
types of animals.
How do I get it?
Submitted by : JK
Answer
There are 7 possible answers to it.
Assume that there are B Buffaloes, C Cows and S Sheep.
It is given that a Buffalo produces 10 pounds of milk, a Cow produces 1 pound of mile and a
Sheep produces 0.25 pound of
milk. Also, we need 100 pound of milk from exactly 100 animals, we get 2 equations.
10*B + C + 0.25*S = 100 --------- (I)
B + C + S = 100 --------- (II)
Subtracting equation (II) from equation (I)
9*B - 0.75*S = 0
36*B - 3*S = 0 (multiplied by 4)
12*B - S = 0 (division by 3)
12*B = S
Now, for different values of B, we will get multiple solutions.
1 Buffalo, 12 Sheep, 87 Cows
2 Buffaloes, 24 Sheep, 74 Cows
My uncle married a woman about three years ago, but I've never had an aunt.
How is that possible?
.
Submitted by : AJ
Answer
There are multiple possible answers to it.
First and the most appropriate answer is : You are female and your uncle married to you. Hence,
now your uncle is your hubby
and you donot have any aunt as there is no uncle. There is an assumption that you do not have any
other uncle.
Second possible answer is : Your dad is dead and your mom married to your only uncle. Your
uncle is now your step-father and
his wife is your mom. Hence, there is no aunt.
The Viva Girls are a new pop group from the Orient. Their nicknames are Old Viva (the eldest),
Cold Viva (never gives anything
away), Gold Viva (all rings and bangles), Bold Viva (the leader), and Told Viva (the youngest, at 18,
and always bossed around).
Mai Tai comes from China and is not best friends with Free Lee, who is from Taiwan. The girl
from Japan is 20, a year older than
the girl addicted to jewelry. Bold Viva and Gold Viva are the best of friends. Wee Pee is 3 years
older than Yum Yum. Although the
girls are all different ages the eldest is still only 22. Wing Ding is younger than Cold Viva. Mai Tai
is 2 years older than the leader
who is older than girl from Korea.
What is the name of the girl from Java?
Answer
Wee Pee, nicknamed Cold Viva, is the girl from Java.
Using method of elimination, following can be deduced:
Age Nick name Country
Old Viva 22 Mai Tai China
Cold Viva 21 Wee Pee Java
Gold Viva 19 Free Lee Taiwan
Bold Viva 20 Wing Ding Japan
Told Viva 18 Yum Yum Korea
Given any whole number take the sum of the digits, and the product of the digits, and multiply
these together to get a new whole
number.
For example, starting with 6712, the sum of the digits is (6+7+1+2) = 16, and the product of the
digits is (6*7*1*2) = 84. The answer
in this case is then 84 x 16 = 1344.
If we do this again starting from 1344, we get (1+3+4+4) * (1*3*4*4) = 576
And yet again (5+7+6) * (5*7*6) = 3780
At this stage we know what the next answer will be (without working it out) because, as one digit is
0, the product of the digits will
be 0, and hence the answer will also be 0.
Can you find any numbers to which when we apply the above mentioned rule repeatedly, we never
end up at 0?
Answer
.
Three such numbers are 1, 135 and 144.
It seems that most numbers will eventually end up at 0 when we apply the rule repeatedly. But
there are a few numbers that
have the property that when we apply the rule repeatedly, we never end up at 0.
Start with 332, then we get (3+3+2) * (3*3*2) = 144
And then (1+4+4) * (1*4*4) = 144
Thus if we reach 144, we stay there however many times we apply this rule. We say that 144 is
fixed by this rule. Now try 233
or 98 or 332 or 1224. They all fall into the same group i.e. we reach 144.
There is another number that is fixed by this rule; it is 1 (because the sum of the digits of 1 is 1,
and the product of the digits is
1 so, starting with 1, the answer is 1 * 1 = 1).
And the third one is 135.
If you know some other numbers, do let us know.
Suppose five bales of hay are weighed two at a time in all possible ways. The weights in pounds are
110, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116,
117, 118, 120, and 121.
How much does each bale weigh?
Submitted by : Travis Lara
Answer
They weigh 54, 56, 58, 59, 62 pounds.
Let's assume that the weight of five bales are B1, B2, B3, B4 and B5 pounds respectively. Also, B1
<= B2 <= B3 <= B4 <= B5
It is given that five bales of hay are weighed two at a time in all possible ways. It means that each of
the bale is weighted four
times.
Thus,
4*(B1 + B2 + B3 + B4 + B5) = (110 + 112 + 113 + 114 + 115 + 116 + 117 + 118 + 120 + 121)
4*(B1 + B2 + B3 + B4 + B5) = 1156
(B1 + B2 + B3 + B4 + B5) = 289 pounds
Now, B1 and B2 must add to 110 as they are the lightest one.
B1 + B2 = 110
Similarly, B4 and B5 must add to 121 as they are the heaviest one.
B4 + B5 = 121
From above three equation, we get B3 = 58 pounds
Also, it is obvious that B1 and B3 will add to 112 - the next possible higher value. Similarly, B3
and B5 will add to 120 - the next
possible lower value.
B1 + B3 = 112
B3 + B5 = 120
Substituting B3 = 58, we get B1 = 54 and B5 = 62
From 2 & 3 equations, we get B2 = 56 and B4 = 59
Hence, the weight of five bales are 54, 56, 58, 59 and 62 pounds.
You own a race track with 5 lanes. You have 25 horses, of which you wish to find out the fastest 3.
In how few races can you do it?
.
In any race, you only get the rankings of the horses and not their timings.
Answer
Minimum 7 races required.
Divide the 25 horses into 5 groups of 5 each. Race each group. Now, have the 6th race among the
winners of first 5 races. The
winner of the 6th race is the fastest horse among 25.
There are 5 contenders for the 2nd and 3rd places.
2nd place horse in the 6th race as he lost to the fastest.
3rd place horse in the 6th race as he lost to the fastest and the 2nd place winner.
2nd and 3rd place winners in the fastest horse's first race.
2nd place winner in the 6th race's 2nd place winner horse's first race.
All the other horses lost to at least 3 other horses.
The 1st and 2nd place holders of the 7th race are the 2nd and 3rd fastest horses respectively.
Thus, minimum 7 races required.
There are N players in the Chess Tournament. If a player loses a game, he is immediately
eliminated from the tournament.
How many games will be played to determine the winner?
Answer
N-1 games will be played to determine the winner.
It is clear that there are total of N players and there will be only one winner. If there will be only
one winner, then there should
be (N-1) loosers i.e. (N-1) players should be eliminated from the Chess Tournament. Hence, total
of (N-1) games will be
played.
Let's take an example. Assume that there are 24 players.
In First round, there will be 12 games in which 12 players will be eliminated. In Second round
there will be 6 games. In Third
round there will be 3 games. Forth and Fifth round will have one game each to determine the
winner. Hence, total of
(12+6+3+1+1) 23 games will be played.
You can test it out by taking any value of N. The answer will be (N-1) for all values of N.
Four couples are going to the movie. Each row holds eight seats. Betty and Jim don't want to sit
next to Alice and Tom. Alice and
Tom don't want to sit next to Gertrude and Bill. On the otherhand, Sally and Bob don't want to sit
next to Betty and Jim.
How can the couples arrange themselves in a row so that they all sit where they would like?
Submitted by : Tara Smith
Answer
From the given data, it can be inferred that:
(Sally & Bob) NOT (Betty & Jim) NOT (Alice & Tom) NOT (Gertrude & Bill)
.
(A) NOT (B) means A and B can not seat next to each other.
Now, it is obvious that (Betty & Jim) and (Alice & Tom) will occupy the corner seats as both of
them can have only one
neighbour. Therefore,
(Gertrude & Bill) will seat next to (Betty & Jim)
(Sally & Bob) will seat next to (Gertrude & Bill)
(Alice & Tom) will seat next to (Sally & Bob)
Thus, there are two possible arrangements - a mirror images of each other.
1. (Betty & Jim) - (Gertrude & Bill) - (Sally & Bob) - (Alice & Tom)
2. (Alice & Tom) - (Sally & Bob) - (Gertrude & Bill) - (Betty & Jim)
Imagine a railway station clock with the second-hand on the same axis as the two other hands.
How often in a 24-hour day, will the second-hand be parallel to either of the two other hands?
Answer
In a 24-hour day, the second-hand will be 5714 times parallel to the two other hands.
Within any minute, the second-hand will twice be parallel to each of the two other hands, minute-
hand and hour-hand. Thus,
there are (4*60*24) 5760 such parallel positions in one day.
But, the hour-hand and the minute-hand are parallel to each other 23 times in 12 hours i.e. 46
times in 24 hours. Therefore, 46
parallel positions have to be deducted. Hence, the correct answer is (5760 - 46) 5714.
In a room, there are 100 bulbs numbered from 1 to 100. Initially, all of them are OFF.
Mr. Irfan changes the status of bulb 1 and all the other bulbs which are numbered as integer
multiple of 1 i.e. if bulb is ON, then he
switches it OFF and vice-versa.
After that, he changes the status of bulb 2 and all the other bulbs which are numbered as integer
multiple of 2. (i.e. 2, 4, 6, 8, ...)
Then he changes the status of bulb 3 and all the other bulbs which are numbered as integer
multiple of 3. (i.e. 3, 6, 9, 12, ...)
Mr. Irfan repeats the process for all the numbers till 100.
Can you tell which bulbs will be ON at the end?
Answer
The bulbs 1, 4, 9, 16, 25, 36, 49, 64, 81, 100 will be ON at the end.
As initially all bulbs are OFF, bulbs with odd number of divisors will be ON whereas bulbs with
even number of divisors will be
OFF.
All the numbers have even number of divisors except Perfect Squares. Hence, total of ten bulbs 1,
4, 9, 16, 25, 36, 49, 64, 81,
100 will be ON and other 90 bulbs will be OFF.
For example,
divisors of 17 are 1 and 17 i.e. total 2 - OFF
divisors of 28 are 1, 2, 4, 7, 14 and 28 i.e. total 6 - OFF
divisors of 36 are 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 9, 12, 18 and 36 i.e. total 9 - ON
.
Karan bought a little box of midget matches, each one inch in length. He found that he could
arrange them all in the form of a
triangle whose area was just as many square inches as there were matches.
He then used up six of the matches, and found that with the remainder he could again construct
another triangle whose area was
just as many square inches as there were matches.
And using another six matches he could again do precisely the same.
How many matches were there in the box originally?
Note that the match-box can hold maximum of 50 matches.
Answer
Initially, there were 42 or 36 matches in the match-box.
There are 42 matches in the box with which he could form a triangle 20, 15, 7, with an area of 42
square inches. After 6
matches had been used, the remaining 36 matches would form a triangle 17, 10, 9, with an area of
36 square inches. After
using another 6 matches, the remaining 30 matches would form a triangle 13, 12, 5, with an area of
30 square inches. After
using another 6, the 24 remaining would form a triangle 10, 8, 6, with an area of 24 square inches.
Thus, there are two possible answers. There were either 42 or 36 matches in the match-box.
Also it is interesting to know that there are just 5 such triangles for which the perimeter and the
area is the same (assuming all
sides are integers) and they are :
1. 24 (10, 8, 6)
2. 30 (13, 12, 5)
3. 36 (17, 10, 9)
4. 42 (20, 15, 7)
5. 60 (29, 25, 6)
Six cabins numbered 1-6 consecutively, are arranged in a row and are separated by thin dividers.
These cabins must be assigned
to six staff members based on following facts.
1. Miss Shalaka's work requires her to speak on the phone frequently throughout the day.
2. Miss Shudha prefers cabin number 5 as 5 is her lucky number.
3. Mr. Shaan and Mr. Sharma often talk to each other during their work and prefers to have
adjacent cabins.
4. Mr. Sinha, Mr. Shaan and Mr. Solanki all smoke. Miss Shudha is allergic to smoke and must
have non-smokers adjacent
to her.
5. Mr. Solanki needs silence during work.
Can you tell the cabin numbers of each of them?
Answer
The cabins from left to right (1-6) are of Mr. Solanki, Mr. Sinha, Mr. Shaan, Mr. Sharma, Miss
Shudha and Miss Shalaka.
From (2), cabin number 5 is assigned to Miss Shudha.
As Miss Shudha is allergic to smoke and Mr. Sinha, Mr. Shaan & Mr. Solanki all smoke, they must
be in cabin numbers 1, 2
and 3 not necessarily in the same order. Also, Miss Shalaka and Mr. Sharma must be in cabin 4
and 6.
From (3), Mr. Shaan must be in cabin 3 and Mr. Sharma must be in cabin 4. Thus, Miss Shalaka is
in cabin 6.
.
As Mr. Solanki needs silence during work and Mr. Shaan is in cabin 3 who often talks to Mr.
Sharma during work, Mr. Solanki
must be in cabin 1. Hence, Mr. Sinha is in cabin 2.
Thus, the cabins numbers are
1# Mr. Solanki,
2# Mr. Sinha,
3# Mr. Shaan,
4# Mr. Sharma,
5# Miss Shudha,
6# Miss Shalaka
What is the next number in the given series?
0, 01, 01011, 0101101011011, ?
Answer
0101101011011010110101101101011011
The pattern is - each number is formed from the previous number by substituting '01' for '0' and
'011' for '1' simultaneously at
each occurance
Five friends went for tracking this monsoon, but not together. They climbed different mountains.
1. Sanjiv climbed higher than 1000 meters, but not on Panchgani.
2. Sanjay climbed higher than both Subhash and the one who climbed Murud.
3. Lohgadh is shorter than the mountain climbed by Subhash, but heigher than the one climbed by
Sujay.
4. The tallest mountain was not climbed by Suvdeep.
5. Murud is not the tallest but taller than Panchgani.
6. The mountain which is 2500 meters tall is not Tikona or Panchgani.
7. Visapur is taller than Panchgani, which is taller than the mountains climbed by Sanjiv and Sujay.
Can you figure out who climbed which mountain?
Answer
From (5) & (7), Visapur is the tallest, Murud is the second tallest and Panchgani is the third tallest.
Also, the shortest two are
climbed by Sanjiv and Sujay.
From (3), Tikona is the shortest and climbed by Sujay.
Thus, the mountains from the tallest to the shortest are Visapur - Murud - Panchgani - Lohgadh -
Tikona.
Now draw a table with person names and mountains (as shown below), and discard the impossible
combinations.
There is only one mountain taller than Murud. From (2), Sanjay climbed Visapur.
From (5), Sanjiv climbed Lohgadh. Solving further, Suvdeep climbed Murud and Subhash
climbed Panchgani.
Sanjiv Sanjay Subhash Sujay Suvdeep
Visapur X X X X
Murud X X X X
.
Panchgani X X X X
Lohgadh X X X X
Tikona X X X X
Thus, the answer is as follows:
1. Visapur - Sanjay
2. Murud - Suvdeep
3. Panchgani - Subhash
4. Lohgadh - Sanjiv
5. Tikona - Sujay
There is a Tibetan monastery filled with a number of monks. The number of monks is more than
one, and not unreasonably large.
God visits the monks one night and tells them that he is planning on destroying the world unless
they can solve a puzzle. He puts a
red dot on the foreheads of a certain number of monks, X. X is greater than zero.
Then he takes away all means of communication between the monks, and all means by which the
monks can see themselves. No
mirrors, no hand signals, no nothing. A single monk can see all the other monks, and see if
another monk has a dot on his head or
no, but he cannot see himself, and he cannot communicate in any way with any other monk.
God then says that all of the monks with dots, and only those monks with dots, must jump off of
the cliff next to the monastery and
sacrifice themselves to save the world, at EXACTLY the same moment, on EXACTLY the same
day.
The next morning, all of the monks from the monastery walk out to the edge of the cliff. They
pause and look around, and then walk
quickly back to the monastery.
The second morning, all of the monks from the monastery walk to the edge of the cliff. They
pause, look, and walk back to the
monastery.
The third morning, all of the monks walk to the edge of the cliff. And then all of the monks with
dots, and only those monks with dots
walk to the cliff edge and jump off at the exact same moment.
The question: how many monks jumped, and how did they organize the jump?
Submitted by : George Taylor
Answer
Total 3 monks jumped in, on the third day.
There are two important points. One is that there is atleast one monk with red dot. And the
second is that all the monks are
intelligent ;-)
On the day 1
If there is only one monk with red dot, he would see all monks without the red dot. So he would
know that he is the one and
jump in. But no one jumped.
On the day 2
Now, all the monks know that there are atleast 2 monks with the red dots. If there are exactly two
monks with the red dot, they
would see only one monk with the red dot. So they would know that they have to jump in. But no
one jumped.
On the day 3
Now, all the monks know that there are atleast 3 monks with the red dots. If there are exactly three
monks with the red dot, they
would see only two monks with the red dot. So they would know that they have to jump in.
Thus total 3 monks jumped in on the third day.
P.S. If monks jumped in on Nth days, then there are total N monks with the red dots.
.
Pappu, Nandu, Mamu and Chhoti participated in a POOL compitition.
FACTS
1. There are total of 15 balls.
2. For each ball potted, the player will receive one point.
3. They all will play each other once.
4. A game will end when all the balls are potted.
5. The winner will be the player who scored the most points.
OUTCOMES
1. Chhoti finished with 18 points.
2. Pappu finished with odd number of points.
3. Mamu beat Chhoti by 5 points in the match between them.
4. There was one point difference in match between Nandu and Pappu.
5. Pappu scored twice as many points as Mamu in their game.
6. Chhoti scored one point less against Pappu than he did against Mamu.
7. Mamu scored 7 points against Nandu.
Who won the competition? How many points did each player score?
Answer
Let's put all the given information in a tabular format.
Players P-N P-M P-C N-M N-C M-C Total
Pappu 7 or 8 10 11 --- --- --- Odd points
Nandu 8 or 7 --- --- 8 ---
Mamu --- 5 --- 7 --- 10
Chhoti --- --- 4 --- 5 18
As Pappu finished with odd number of points, he must have scored 8 points in the match
against Nandu.
As Chhoti finished with 18 points, he must have scored 9 points in the match against Nandu.
Players P-N P-M P-C N-M N-C M-C Total
Pappu 8 10 11 --- --- --- 29
Nandu 7 --- --- 8 6 --- 21
Mamu --- 5 --- 7 --- 10 22
Chhoti --- --- 4 --- 9 5 18
Hence, the winner is Pappu with 29 points.
What is the last digit of 746? In other words, what will the remainder be, if 746 is divided by 10?
Don't try to solve this on calculator, you may get the wrong answer. Also, do explain your answer.
Answer
The last digit of 746 is 9.
.
The powers of any number have a repeating pattern for the last digit. It can be found easily without
performing the entire
multiplication of each power.
Let's consider the powers of 7.
7N Value Last Digit
70 1 1
71 7 7
72 49 9
73 343 3
74 2401 1
75 16807 1
76 117649 1
Note that there is a repeating pattern of four numbers (1, 7, 9, 3) for the powers of 7. Hence, the
last digit of 744 will be 1, of 745
will be 7 and of 746 will be 9.
Also, there is no need to actually perform the entire multiplication. Start with 1, multiply it by 7,
discard all digits except units and
multiply again by 7 and so on.
A mule and a donkey were carrying full sacks on their backs.
The mule started complaining that his load was too heavy. The donkey said to him "Why are you
complaining? If you gave me one
of your sacks I'd have double what you have and if I give you one of my sacks we'd have an even
amount."
How many sacks were each of them carrying? Give the minimal possible answer.
Submitted by : Megan Ponta
Answer
The mule was carrying 5 sacks and the donkey was carrying 7 sacks.
Let's assume that the mule was carrying M sacks and the donkey was carrying D sacks.
As the donkey told the mule, "If you gave me one of your sacks I'd have double what you have."
D + 1 = 2 * (M-1)
D + 1 = 2M - 2
D = 2M - 3
The donkey also said, "If I give you one of my sacks we'd have an even amount."
D-1=M+1
D=M+2
Comparing both the equations,
2M - 3 = M + 2
M=5
Substituting M=5 in any of above equation, we get D=7
Hence, the mule was carrying 5 sacks and the donkey was carrying 7 sacks.
.
Substitute digits for the letters to make the following addition problem true.
WHOSE
TEETH
ARE
+AS
-------------------
SWORDS
you substitute 3 for the letter H, no other letter can be 3 and all other H in the puzzle must be 3.
Answer
It is obvious that S=1 and T=9.
Also, (H + E) should be greater than 10 and hence, (E + H + E) must 20. Thus, there are 3
possible values for (E, H) pair: (6, 8)
or (7, 6) or (8, 4). Use trial-n-error and everything will fit-in.
WHOSE28516
TEETH96698
ARE476
+AS+41
------------------- -------------------
SWORDS125731
ONE
NINE
TWENTY
+FIFTY
-------------------
EIGHTY
you substitute 3 for the letter Y, no other letter can be 3 and all other Y in the puzzle must be 3.
Answer
G=0, H=1, Y=2, T=3, E=4, I=5, W=6, F=7, N=8, O=9
It is obvious that E = T + 1
Also, 2E + 2Y = Y i.e. 2E + Y must be either 10 or 20 and Y must be an even number. Thus,
possible values of (E, Y) pair are
(4, 2) (9, 2) (3, 4) (8, 4) (2, 6) (7, 6) (1, 8) (6, 8)
Now, taking each pair individually, only one pair makes the addition true.
.
ONE984
NINE8584
TWENTY364832
+FIFTY+75732
------------------- -------------------
EIGHTY450132
What are the next two numbers in the given series?
0, 6, 24, 60, 120, 210, ?, ?
Answer
The pattern is (N^3 - N), where N is the position.
First Number = 1^3 - 1 = 0
Second Number = 2^3 - 2 = 6
Third Number = 3^3 - 3 = 24
Fourth Number = 4^3 - 4 = 60
Fifth Number = 5^3 - 5 = 120
Sixth Number = 6^3 - 6 = 210
Seventh Number = 7^3 - 7 = 336
Eighth Number = 8^3 - 8 = 504
Thus, the next two numbers are 336 and 504.
Note the interesting patteren here:
0 6 24 60 120 210
6 18 36 60 90
12 18 24 30
666
John lives in "Friends Society" where all the houses are in a row and are numbered sequentially
starting from 1. His house number
is 109.
Jessy lives in the same society. All the house numbers on the left side of Jessy's house add up
exactly the same as all the house
numbers on the right side of her house.
.
What is the number of Jessy's house? Find the minimal possible answer.
Answer
There are 288 houses and Jessy's house number is 204.
Let's assume that in the "Friends Society" there are total N houses numbered from 1 to N and
Jessy's house number is X.
Now it is given that all the house numbers on the left side of Jessy's house add up exactly the same
as all the house numbers
on the right side of her house. Hence,
1 + 2 + 3 + ..... + (X-1) = (X+1) + (X+2) + (X+3) + ..... + N
Both the sides of the above equations are in A.P. Hence, using A.P. summation formaula,
[(X-1)/2][2*(1) + (X-1-1)] = [(N-X)/2][2*(X+1) + (N-X-1)]
[X-1][(2) + (X-2)] = [N-X][(2X+2) + (N-X-1)]
(X-1)(X) = (N-X)(N+X+1)
X2 - X = N2 + NX + N - NX - X2 - X
X2 = N2 + N - X2
2X2 = N2 + N
X2 = (N2 + N)/2
X2 = N(N+1)/2
Now, using Trial and Error method to find values of N and X such that above equation is satisfied,
we get
1. N = 8, X = 6
2. N = 49, X = 35
3. N = 288, X = 204
4. N = 1681, X = 1189
5. N = 9800, X = 6930
But we require minimal possible answer and it is given that John's house number is 109. It means
that there are atleast 109
houses. Hence, first two are not possible. And the answer is : there are 288 houses and Jessy's
house number is 204.
Write 1111......(243 times) i.e. a 243 digit number with all 1s.
Prove that it is divisible by 243.
@ m : @ma G
a
Answr
Pr
v sng h mahmaca n c
n.
Frs hr ar a c
p
f hngs
n

[1] A n mr wh
s gs a p
a m p
f hr s vsa 3.
.g. 369 3+6+9=18 1+8=9 whch s a m p
f 3 hnc 369 s vsa 3.
[2] Whnvr a n mr (X) s m p wh an
hr n mr (Y) hn h pr
c (X*Y) w
hav a h fac
rs
f X as w as
a h fac
rs
f Y n s s
f fac
rs.
.g. f X has fac
rs
f (1,P,Q,X) an Y has fac
rs
f (1,Q,R,Y) hn X*Y has fac
rs
f
(1,P,Q,Q,R,X,Y).
L
N = an srs
f gs (.g. N=369)
D = h n mr
f gs n N (.g. f N=369 hn D=3)
P = s a n mr c
nsr c n h f

wng wa a 1, f

w (D-1) 0s, f

w an
hr 1,
f

w (D-1) 0s,
f

w an
hr 1. (.g. f N=369 hn D=3 an P w
1001001) N
ha P w awas
vs 3.
As
, f w m p N wh P w ar ssna rpang N f
r (D-1) ms.
.g. f N=369 hn D=3, P=1001001 an N*P=369369369
L's sar wh N=111. I s car ha N s vs 3. (Fr
m [1])
.
As
, D=3 an P=1001001
N*P=111111111 (9 ms)
Th rs ng n mr 111111111 m s vs 9 as N an P
h ar vs 3.
N
w, 's sar wh N=111111111. I s car ha N s vs 9.
As
, D=9 an P=1000000001000000001
N*P=111111111... (27 ms)
Th rs ng n mr 1111111... (27 ms) m s vs 27 as N s vs 9 an P s
vs 3.
Rpa h sam pr
c r f
r N=1111111... (27 ms) Th rs ng n mr 1111111... (81
ms) m s vs 81 as
N s vs 27 an P s vs 3.
@mar, f
r N=1111111... (81 ms) Th rs ng n mr 1111111... (243 ms) m s
vs 243 as N s vs
81 an P s vs 3.
Th s, 1111111... (243 ms) s vs 243.
Thanks
Ran H chrs
n f
r s

n !!!
Bran Tasr N
00520
@
m
mark h sx facs
f a wh h n mrs 1, 2 an 3 - ach n mr wc. Th
was p
n a a. F
r p
p
- Abu, Babu, Calu and Dabu - sat around the table so that each one was able to see only three sides
of the die at a glance.
Abu sees the number 1 and two even numbers.
Babu and Calu can see three different numbers each.
Dabu sees number 2 twice and he can't remember the third number.
What number is face down on the table?
Answer
Number 3 is face down on the table.
If Abu can see two even numbers i.e. number 2 twice, and if Dabu can see number 2 twice, then
number 2 must be facing up.
Now everything else is simple. (see the following diagram)
Dabu Abu
1
322
1
Calu Babu
Thus, the number hidden from the view is number 3 and hence the answer
Last Saturday Milan went for the late night show and came late. In the morning family members
asked him which movie did he see.
.
He gave different answers to everyone.
He told to his father that he had gone to see MONEY.
According to his mom, he saw either JOHNY or BABLU.
His elder brother came to know that he saw BHABI.
To his sister, he told ROBOT.
And his grandpa heard that he saw BUNNY.
Thus, Milan gave six movie names, all five letter words. But he saw some other movie with five
letter word. Moreover, each of the
six movie names mentioned above has exactly two letters common with the movie he saw. (with the
same positions)
Can you tell which movie did Milan see?
Answer
Milan saw BOBBY.
The six movie names are - MONEY, JOHNY, BABLU, BHABI, ROBOT and BUNNY.
Compare MONEY and JOHNY. They have O common at the second place and Y common at
the fifth place. Also, they can't
have two different letters each, common with the required movie as the letters in remaining three
places are all different. Thus,
the required movie must have either O at the second place or Y at the fifth place or both.
Similarly, comparing JOHNY and BUNNY - the required movie must have either N at the fourth
place or Y at the fifth place or
both. Also, comparing MONEY and BUNNY - the required movie must have either N at the third
place or Y at the fifth place or
both.
From the above 3 deduction, either Y is at fifth place or O is at the second place and N is at the
third & fourth place. The later
combination is not possible as BABLU, BHABI & ROBOT will need at least 3 other letters which
makes the required movie 6
letter long. Hence, the required movie must have Y at the fifth place.
Now Y is not there in BABLU and BHABI at the fifth place and they have only B common at the
first place. Hence, B must be
the first letter.
As B is at the first place and Y is at the fifth place and every movie has exactly 2 letters common
with the required movie. From
BUNNY, the required movie do not have U at the second place and N at the third and fourth
place. Now looking at JOHNY and
MONEY, they must have O common at the second place.
Using the same kind of arguments for BABLU, BHABI and ROBOT, we can conclude that
Milan saw BOBBY.
In Mr. Mehta's family, there are one grandfather, one grandmother, two fathers, two mothers, one
father-in-law, one mother-in-law,
four children, three grandchildren, one brother, two sisters, two sons, two daughters and one
daughter-in-law.
How many members are there in Mr. Mehta's family? Give minimal possible answer.
Answer
There are 7 members in Mr. Mehta's family. Mother & Father of Mr. Mehta, Mr. & Mrs. Mehta,
his son and two daughters.
Mother & Father of Mr. Mehta
||
Mr. & Mrs. Mehta
||
One Son & Two Daughters
.
A murderer is condemned to death. He has to choose between three rooms. The first is full of
raging fires, the second is full of
assassins with loaded guns, and the third is full of lions that haven't eaten in 3 years.
Which room is the safest for him?
Answer
The third room - full of lions - is the safest.
The third room is full of lions that HAVEN'T EATEN IN 3 YEARS. It is obvious that they won't
survive without eating for 3 years,
they must be dead
Makayla had $1.19 in change. None of the coins was a dollar.
Nicole ask her for change for a dollar, but Makayla could not make change.
What coins did she have?
Submitted by : Patricia
Answer
As it is given that Makayla had $1.19, it means she would have four pennies. Now, the remaining
$1.15 in coins must not add
up for exactly a dollar. Therefore she would not have 4 quarters or 2 quarters and 5 dimes. But
she would have either 1 quarter
or 3 quarters. Hence, there are 2 solutions.
Solution I
1 Quarter, 9 Dimes, 4 Pennies (0.25 + 0.90 + 0.04 = $1.19)
Solution II
3 Quarters, 4 Dimes, 4 Pennies (0.75 + 0.40 + 0.04 = $1.19)
What are the next two number in the series?
1, 2, 4, 7, 28, 33, 198, ?, ?
Answer
The pattern is : 1 + 1 * 2 + 3 * 4 + 5 * 6 + 7 * 8 + 9 * 10 or to the current number add and
multiply alternatively by the number's
position to get the next number.
First number = 1
Second number = 1 + 1 = 2
Third number = 2 * 2 = 4
Fourth number = 4 + 3 = 7
Fifth number = 7 * 4 = 28
Sixth number = 28 + 5 = 33
Seventh number = 33 * 6 = 198
Eight number = 198 + 7 = 205
Ninth number = 205 * 8 = 1640
Tenth number = 1640 + 9 = 1649
.
Eleven theater groups took part in a "Prithvi" festival. Every day some of the groups performed
while the others watched.
When the festival was over, each one of the groups has been able to attend, at least once, the
performance of each of the other
groups.
What is the minimum number of days that the "Prithvi" festival lasted? Also, how many
performances were there?
Note that the day on which a group perform, they do not attend any performance on that day.
Answer
The festival lasted for 6 days and total performance were 21.
Let the 11 groups be G1, G2, G3, ..... , G11. If they performed as shown below, each group was
able to perform at least once in
front of every other group.
G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11
Day 1 X X X X
Day 2 X X X X
Day 3 X X X X
Day 4 X X X X
Day 5 X X X X
Day 6 X
Thus, the festival lasted for 6 days and there were total 21 performances.
A CAR has a value of 1 and a TRACTOR has a value of 2.
What is the value of an AIRPLANE? Note that AIRPLANE costs more than CAR or
TRACTOR.
@ubmitted by : Lynda
Answer
AIRPLANE has a value of 4.
The value of each vehicle equals the total number of vowels in the word.
CAR has 1 vowel i.e. A
TRACTOR has 2 vowels i.e. A O
AIRPLANE has 4 vowels i.e. A I A E
There is one more possible answer: The value of each vehicle equals the total number of
DI@TINCT vowels in the word. @o the
value of AIRPLANE will be 3.
Ankit and Tejas divided a bag of Apples between them.
Tejas said, "It's not fair! You have 3 times as many Apples I have." Ankit said, "OK, I will give you
one Apple for each year of your
age." Tejas replied, "@till not fair. Now, you have twice as many Apples as I have." "Dear, that's fair
enough as I am twice older than
you.", said Ankit.
Ankit went to Kitchen to drink water. While Ankit was in Kitchen, Tejas took apples from Ankit's
pile equal to Ankit's age.
.
Who have more apples now?
Answer
At the end, Ankit and Tejas, both have the same number of apples.
Let's assume that initially Tejas got N apples and his age is T years. Hence, initially Ankit got 3N
apples and his age is 2T
years.
Operation Ankit's Apples Tejas's Apples
Initially 3N N
Ankit gave T apples to Tejas
(equals age of Tejas) 3N - T N + T
Tejas took 2T apples from Ankit's pile
(equals age of Ankit) 3N - 3T N + 3T
It is given that after Ankit gave T apples to Tejas, Ankit had twice as many apples as Tejas had.
3N - T = 2*(N + T)
3N - T = 2N + 2T
N = 3T
From the table, at the end Ankit have (3N - 3T) apples and Tejas have (N + 3T) apples.
Substituting N = 3T, we get
Ankit's apples = 3N - 3T = 9T - 3T = 6T
Tejas's apples = N + 3T = 3T + 3T = 6T
Thus, at the end Ankit and Tejas, both have the same number of apples.
There are four people in a room (not including you). Exactly two of these four always tell the truth.
The other two always lie.
You have to figure out who is who IN ONLY 2 QUESTIONS. Your questions have to be YES or
NO questions and can only be
answered by one person. (If you ask the same question to two different people then that counts as
two questions). Keep in mind
that all four know each other's characteristics whether they lie or not.
What questions would you ask to figure out who is who? Remember that you can ask only 2
questions.
Submitted by : Ryan Hutcherson
Answer
0-represents a Liar
1-represents a Truth Teller
ABCD
-------
0 0 1 1 A and B are Liars
0 1 0 1 A and C are Liars
0 1 1 0 A and D are Liars
1 0 0 1 B and C are Liars
1 0 1 0 B and D are Liars
1 1 0 0 C and D are Liars
.
As you can see there are 6 possible cases. If you give only yes or no questions and get only yes or
no responses the best you
can do is eliminate half of the cases for every question asked. That means after asking the first
question the best (worst case)
scenario you can end up with is to eliminate all but three cases. That means that the next question
addresses three cases and
can at best eliminate only 1!
That means that you cannot solve this in 2 questions "giving only yes or no questions and get
ONLY yes or no responses". The
trick is to ask a question that has the potential of being answered with: "yes", "no", or no response at
all.
First Question
Ask A: is B a Truth teller AND is C a Liar.
(Asking A: does B=1 AND does C=0)
if answer to first Question is YES: then do {PART 1}
if answer to first Question is NO: then skip to {PART 2}
---------------------{PART 1}---------------------
we know it is one of the following scenarios:
ABCD
-------
0011
1100
0110
Second Question:
Ask C: Let's assign a value of 0 for every Liar and a value of 1 for every Truth teller in the room.
Let's also suppose
that B has a secret number in his head that ONLY HE KNOWS. All we know about this number
is that it is greater than
0, less than 2, and is not an integer. Would B say that the sum of A and B is greater than the secret
number he is
thinking of?
(Asking C: would B say (A+B) > n; where 0>n>2 and n is not an integer)
If C answers YES:
ABCD
-------
0 0 1 1 A and B are the Liars
If A and B are Liars then their sum (0+0) will 0. We know the number B is thinking of is greater
than 0. Therefore B will lie and
say YES. C will tell us the truth of what B would say and so he says YES.
If C answers NO:
ABCD
-------
1 1 0 0 C and D are the Liars
If A and B are Truth tellers then their sum (1+1) will 2. We know the number B is thinking of is
less than 2. Therefore B will tell
the truth and say YES. HOWEVER, C will LIE about what B will say and his response will be
NO.
IF C DOESN'T answer:
ABCD
-------
0 1 1 0 A and D are the Liars
If A is a liar and B is a Truth teller then their sum (0+1) will 1. We know the number B is thinking
of is less than 2 and greater
than 0 but ONLY B KNOWS for sure what its value is. Therefore C does not know for sure what
B will say (even though he
knows it will be the truth). Therefore C doesn't answer because if he did he could run the risk of
telling a lie which, of course, he
never does. [ALL DONE]
---------------------{PART 2}---------------------
We know it is one of the following scenarios:
ABCD
.
-------
1001
1010
0101
Second Question:
Ask C: Let's assign a value of 0 for every Liar and a value of 1 for every Truth teller in the room.
Let's also suppose
that B has a secret number in his head that ONLY HE KNOWS. All we know about this number
is that it is greater than
0, less than 2, and is not an integer. Would B say that the sum of D and B is greater than the secret
number he is
thinking of?
(Asking C: would B say (D+B) > n; where 0>n>2 and n is not an integer)
If C answers YES:
ABCD
-------
1 0 1 0 B and D are the Liars
If D and B are Liars then their sum (0+0) will 0. We know the number B is thinking of is greater
than 0. Therefore B will lie and
say YES. C will tell us the truth of what B would say and so he says YES.
If C answers NO:
ABCD
-------
0 1 0 1 A and C are the Liars
If D and B are Truth tellers then their sum (1+1) will 2. We know the number B is thinking of is
less than 2. Therefore B will tell
the truth and say YES. HOWEVER, C will LIE about what B will say and his response will be
NO.
IF C DOESN'T answer:
ABCD
-------
1 0 0 1 B and C are the Liars
If B is a liar and D is a Truth teller then their sum (0+1) will 1. We know the number B is thinking
of is less than 2 and greater
than 0 but ONLY B KNOWS for sure what its value is. Therefore C does not know for sure what
B will say (even though he
knows it will be a lie). Therefore C doesn't answer because if he did he could run the risk of telling
the truth which, of course, he
never does. [ALL DONE]
Thanks to Ryan Hutcherson !!!
Here is one more valid answer (and much more simpler) from Carmel.
Lets call our people A, B, C & D
T = always tells the truth
L = always lies
"Same" means both liars or both truthtellers.
"Different" means one is a liar and one tells the truth.
Ask D "IF A AND B ARE DIFFERENT, is A a truth-teller?"
If D answers yes,
Ask A "Are B and C the same?"
If A answers yes
A=T, B=L, C=L, D=T
.
If A answers no
A=L, B=T, C=T, D=L
If D answers no,
Ask A "Are B and D the same?"
If A answers yes
A=T, B=L, C=T, D=L
If A answers no
A=L, B=T, C=L, D=T
If D doesn't answer, then it means that
A and B are the same.
Ask A "Are C & D the same?"
If A answers yes,
A=T, B=T, C=L, D=L
If A answers no,
A=L, B=L, C=T, D=T
Explanation: there are six different outcomes, you only get 2 questions. The questions can only be
answered yes or no. There
is no stipulation that anyone MUST answer a question.
A woman shoots her husband. Then she holds him under water for over 5 minutes. Finally she
hangs him. But 5 minutes later they
both go out together and enjoy a wonderful dinner together.
How can this be?
Answer
The woman is a photographer.
She shoots a picture of her husband with camera, developes it in darkroom by dipping it in water,
and then hangs it up to dry.
.
Mr. Subramaniam rents a private car for Andheri-Colaba-Andheri trip. It costs him Rs. 300
everyday.
One day the car driver informed Mr. Subramaniam that there were two students from Bandra who
wished to go from Bandra to
Colaba and back to Bandra. Bandra is halfway between Andheri and Colaba. Mr. Subramaniam
asked the driver to let the students
travel with him.
On the first day when they came, Mr. Subramaniam said, "If you tell me the mathematically
correct price you should pay individually
for your portion of the trip, I will let you travel for free."
How much should the individual student pay for their journey?
Answer
The individual student should pay Rs. 50 for their journey.
Note that 3 persons are travelling between Bandra and Colaba.
The entire trip costs Rs. 300 to Mr. Subramanian. Hence, half of the trip costs Rs. 150.
For Andheri-Bandra-Andheri, only one person i.e. Mr. Subramaniam is travelling. Hence, he
would pay Rs. 150.
For Bandra-Colaba-Bandra, three persons i.e Mr. Subramaniam and two students, are travelling.
Hence, each student would
pay Rs. 50.
Here is the family tree of Mr. RAHUL
RAHUL
|
---------------------------------------------
||||
RATISH YASH OM TRILOK
||?
-------- ------------------
|||||
AMAR AMIT RAM HARSH ASHOK
||
----- -------
|||||
How many children does Mr. TRILOK have?
Answer
TRILOK have 5 children.
Name of the person and number of his children are related by some pattern.
.
Assign each vowel following values.
A=0 E=1 I=2 O=3 U=4
The number of children to any person is the sum of the values represented by vowels in his name.
RATISH = 0(A) + 2(I) = 2
OM = 3(O) = 3
AMIT = 0(A) + 2(I) = 2
ASHOK = 0(A) + 3(O) = 3
TRILOK = 2(I) + 3(O) = 5
Hence, TRILOK have 5 children.
Substitute digits for the letters to make the following relation true.
SEND
+MORE
----------
MONEY
you substitute 3 for the letter S, no other letter can be 3 and all other S in the puzzle must be 3.
Submitted by Omesh Garg
Answer
It is obvious that M=1.
If S=9 and if there is a carry, the maximum value of O will be 1. But M=1. Hence, O has to be 0.
Also, S has to be 9 as there is no other way of getting total 10 for S+M.
Now, N is (E+1) i.e. there must be a carry from (N+R). It means that R must be 9 which is already
assigned to S. Hence, R has
to be 8 and a carry from (D+E) will make R's value 9. Now, using trial-n-error
9 5 6 7 O=0, M=1, Y=2, E=5,
+ 1 0 8 5 N=6, D=7, R=8, S=9
----------
10652
Brain Teaser No 00573
I give you a group of three. One is sitting down, and will never get up. The second eats as much as
is given to him, yet is always
hungry. The third goes away and never returns.
What are they?
Submitted by Chris
Answer
The first line states "a group of three". It means that the answer should contain three things related
to each other and ofcourse
satisfies the given conditions. One such group is
Stove, Fire, and Smoke
.
Major Jasbir is forming five-person Special Task Group. The group must contain one leader, two
bomb-experts and two soldiers.
P, Q and R are possible bomb-experts. R, S and T are possible leaders. U, V and W are possible
soldiers. Also, P and R prefers to
work with each other in the same team. T prefers to work only if V works.
How many different possible Groups, Major Jasbir can make?
Answer
Major Jasbir can make 8 different possible groups.
As 2 bomb-experts to be selected from the given 3 and also P & R prefers to work together, PR
must be there in all the
possible Groups. Also, T prefers to work only if V works. It doesn't mean that V won't work
without T.
Hence, possible groups are
PR - S - UV
PR - S - VW
PR - S - WU
PR - T - UV
PR - T - VW
PQ - R - UV
PQ - R - VW
PQ - R - WU
Hence, there 8 different groups are possible.
Milan uses an escalator at the railway station.
If he runs up 8 steps of the escalator, then it takes him 40.0 seconds to reach the top of the
escalator.
If he runs up 15 steps of the escalator, then it takes him only 22.5 seconds to reach the top of the
escalator.
How many seconds would it take Milan to reach the top, if he did not run up any steps of the
escalator at all? Also, how many steps
are visible, when the escalator is stationary?
Answer
There are a total of 24 steps. Milan would take 60 seconds to reach the top.
If Milan runs up 8 steps, then he needs 40.0 seconds to reach the top. And, if he runs up 15 steps,
then he needs 22.5 seconds
to reach the top. Thus, the 7 additional steps take 17.5 seconds. Therefore, each step saves 2.5
seconds.
Total steps in escalator
= 8 + 40.0 / 2.5 (or 15 + 22.5 / 2.5)-
= 24 steps
Now, if Milan did not run up any steps at all, he would reach the top of the escalator in
60.0 seconds. (i.e. 24 steps x 2.5 seconds/step)
Mr. Wagle goes to work by a bus. One day he falls asleep when the bus still has twice as far to go
as it has already gone.
Halfway through the trip he wakes up as the bus bounces over some bad potholes. When he
finally falls asleep again, the bus still
.
has half the distance to go that it has already travelled. Fortunately, Mr. Wagle wakes up at the end
of his trip.
What portion of the total trip did Mr. Wagle sleep?
Answer
Mr. wagle slept through half his trip.
Let's draw a timeline. Picture the bus route on a line showen below:
---------------- ________ -------- ________________
Start 1/3 1/2 2/3 End
----- shows time for which Mr. Wagle was not sleeping
_____ shows time for which Mr. Wagle was sleeping
When Mr. Wagle fell asleep the first time, the bus sill had twice as far to go as it had already gone,
that marks the first third of
his trip.
He wake up halfway through the trip i.e slept from 1/3 mark to the 1/2 mark. He fell sleep again
when the bus still had half the
distance to go that it had already traveled i.e 2/3 mark.
Adding up, all sleeping times,
= (1/2 - 1/3) + (1 - 2/3)
= 1/6 + 1/3
= 1/2
Hence, Mr. wagle slept through half his trip.
In Column-I below, are given some words. These have been translated into a code language. The
code equivalents of the words in
Column-I are given in Column-II, not necessarily opposite to the corresponding words. Also, the
codes for the different letters in
each word have also not been given the same order as these letter occur in the original word.
COLUMN-I COLUMN-II
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TAPE moi
COP lhhpok
TIE nls
ROTATE nhpk
SAY nkpl
TREAT msr
YEAR khlph
SIP hrp
TYRE pmlh
Can you decode the individual letter codes?
Answer
.
We first find the exact codes of the each given words.
ROTATE is a 6-letter word. So its code is lhhpok. And h is for T.
TREAT is a 5-letter word. So its code is khlph.
The 4-letter words are TAPE, YEAR, TYRE and codes are nhpk, nkpl, pmlh. YEAR and TYRE
have 3 letters in common (Y, E,
R). They must be either nhpk or nkpl. Hence, the code for TAPE is pmlh and m is for P. Also the
code for TYRE is nhpk (as h
is for T) and the code for YEAR is nkpl.
The 3-letter words are COP, TIE, SAY, SIP and codes are moi, nls, msr, hrp.
The code for TIE is hrp.
The code for SIP is msr.
The code for COP is moi. And the code for SAY is nls.
Thus, the words and their codes are:
ROTATE lhhpok
TREAT khlph
TAPE pmlh
TYRE nhpk
YEAR nkpl
TIE hrp
COP moi
SIP msr
SAY nls
So far we know that h is for T and m is for P.
In SAY and SIP, the common letter is S stands for s.
In TYRE and SAY, the common letter Y stands for n.
Thus, in SAY, the remaining letter A stands for l.
In TIE and SIP, the common letter I stands for r.
Thus, in TIE, the remaining letter E stands for p.
In ROTATE and COP, the common letter O stands for o.
Thus, in ROTATE, the remaining letter R stands for k.
Also, in COP, the remaining letter C stands for i.
Summerizing h-T, i-C, k-R, l-A, m-P, n-Y, o-O, p-E, r-I, s-S
If there is a Yellow house on Bluebird Lane, a Green house on Orange Street, a Pink house on
Kitten Road, a Black house on
Hhitehorse Pike and a Purple house on Firebird hill, where's the White house?
Submitted by : Michelle
Answer
The White House is in Pennsylvania Ave. in Washington DC.
The other information is just to divert your mind.
You are locked inside a room with 6 doors - A, B, C, D, E, F. Out of which 3 are Entrances only
and 3 are Exits only.
.
One person came in through door F and two minutes later second person came in through door
A. He said, "You will be set free, if
you pass through all 6 doors, each door once only and in correct order. Also, door A must be
followed by door B or E, door B by C
or E, door C by D or F, door D by A or F, door E by B or D and door F by C or D."
After saying that they both left through door B and unlocked all doors. In which order must you
pass through the doors?
Answer
The correct order is CFDABE
It is given that one person came in through door F and second person came in through door A. It
means that door A and door F
are Entrances. Also, they both left through door B. Hence, door B is Exit.
As Exit and Entrance should alter each other and we know two Entrances, let's assume that the
third Entrance is W. Thus,
there are 6 possibilities with "_" indicating Exit.
(1) _W_A_F (2) _W_F_A (3) _F_W_A (4) _F_A_W (5) _A_W_F (6) _A_F_W
As door A must be followed by door B or E and none of them lead to the door F, (1) and (6) are
not possible.
Also, door D must be the Exit as only door D leads to the door A and door A is the Entrance.
(2) _W_FDA (3) _F_WDA (4) _FDA_W (5) DA_W_F
Only door D and door C lead to the door F. But door D is used. Hence, door C must be the Exit
and precede door F. Also, the
third Exit is B and the W must be door E.
(2) BECFDA (3) CFBEDA (4) CFDABE (5) DACEBF
But only door B leads to the door C and both are Exits. Hence, (2) and (5) are not possible. Also,
door F does not lead to door
B - discard (3). Hence, the possible order is (4) i.e. CFDABE.
I
AGREE
+ITS
-------------------
TOUGH
you substitute 3 for the letter S, no other letter can be 3 and all other S in the puzzle must be 3.
Answer
I=7, A=2, G=9, R=4, E=5, T=3, S=6, O=0, G=9, H=8
It is obvious that T=A+1. Also, G=9, O=0 and R+I>10. Hence, T>1
There must be a carry from the units. Hence E+T=8. So (E, T) can be (6, 2), (5, 3), (3, 5), (2, 6) or
(1, 7).
Now, use trial-n-error and solve it.
I7
AGREE29455
.
+ITS+736
------------------- -------------------
TOUGH30198
Given a rectangular cake with a rectangular piece removed (any Size or Orientation).
How would you cut the remainder of the cake into two equal halves with one straight cut of a
knife?
Answer
If you cut a rectangular thing along the center (horizontally, vertically or at any angle), you will get
two halves.
Find the centers of both - the original cake and the removed piece. Now, cut the reminder along
the line connecting these two
centers.
This is true because this line cut both - the original cake and the removed piece - in half, thus the
remainder into two halves.
-2, 4, -12, 48, -240, ?, ?
Submitted by : Lynda
Answer
The next two numbers in the series are 1440 and -10080.
The pattern is - multiply previous number by the current position number and then take negative
of the result (i.e. multiply by -
1), starting with 2.
First Number = 2 * -1 = -2
Second Number = -2 * -2 = 4
Second Number = 4 * -3 = -12
Third Number = -12 * -4 = 48
Fourth Number = 48 * -5 = -240
Fifth Number = -240 * -6 = 1440
Sixth Number = 1440 * -7 = -10080
Thus, the next two numbers are 1440 and -10080.
Madam, I'm Adam.
Able was I ere I saw Elba.
Egad, a base tone denotes a bad age.
What do these 3 sentences have in common?
.
Answer
They are Palindromes.
Palindromes are those words/sentences which can be read same both ways - backwards and
forwards.
Two friends, Alex and Bob, go to a bookshop, together with their sons Peter and Tim. All four of
them buy some books; each book
costs a whole amount in cents.
When they leave the bookshop, they notice that both fathers have spent 21 cents more than their
respective sons. Moreover, each
of them paid per book the same amount of cents as books that he bought.
The difference between the number of books of Alex and Peter is five.
Who is the father of Tim?
Answer
Alex is the father of Tim.
For each father-son couple, the father bought X books of X cents, the son bought Y books of Y
cents. The difference between
their expenses is 21 cents, thus X*X - Y*Y = 21
Since X and Y are whole numbers (each book costs a whole amount of cents), there are two
possible solutions: (X=5, Y=2) or
(X=11, Y=10).
Because the difference between Alex and Peter is 5 books, this means that father Alex bought 5
books and son Peter 10. This
means that the other son, Tim, bought 2 books, and that his father is Alex.
A mental patient was being treated at an asylum because he thought he was Napoleon.
The warden gave him a lie-detector test and asked him whether or not he was Napoleon. He said,
"No". The machine said he was
lying.
Is the man delirious or not?
Submitted by : Bob
Answer
It is a paradox !!!
The machine said that he was lying. It means that he was Napoleon. But remember that he is a
mental patient in asylum
because he thought he was Napolean. So if we assume that he is a mental patient and nothing is
wrong with the lie-detector
machine, it is a paradox.
When we speak of an unstoppable cannonball, we mean that it can't be stopped. When we speak
of an immovable pole, we mean
that it can't be moved by anything.
What would happen if an unstoppable cannonball hit an immovable pole?
.
@ubmitted by Bob
Answer
The two cannot coexist in the same universe.
"We - Amar, Akbar and Anthony - each have some children.
1. Amar has at least one girl and twice as many boys as girls.
2. Akbar has at least one girl and three times as many boys as girls.
3. Anthony has at least one girl and three more boys than girls.
4. When I tell you the number of children we have altogether - a number less than 25 - you will
know how many children I
have, but not how many children each of others has."
Who is the speaker and how many children he have?
Answer
Amar is the speaker and he have 6 children.
Find out possible number of children each can have and then use trial-n-error.
From (1), Amar has at least 3 children and any number from -
3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, .....
From (2), Akbar has at least 4 children and any number from -
4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, .....
From (3), Anthony has at least 5 children and any number from -
5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, .....
From (4), total number of children are at most 24. Also, if total number of children is odd, Amar
must have an even number of
children and if total number of children is even, Amar must have an odd number of children.
Using some trial-n-error
The total number of children can not be 13 as no three numbers - one from each sequence - can
add up to 13.
The total number of children can not be 12, 14, 15, 16 or 17 as there is just a one way to get that
sum by adding up
one number from each sequence. Hence, we will know how many children they individually have.
Thus, contradicts
the statement (4).
The total number of children can not be 18, 20, 21, 22, 23 or 24 as there are multiple ways to
get that sum. Hence, we
won't know how many children, at least one of them have. Again contradicting the statement (4).
Thus, the total number of children must be 19 and there are two possible cases
1> Amar-6, Akbar-4, Anthony-9
2> Amar-6, Akbar-8, Anthony-5
In both the cases, we know that Amar have 6 children and hence Amar is the speaker.
I was sitting around with my friend Ramlal and his grandfather last week, and the topic of birthday
surprises came up.
Ramlal mentioned that one of the greatest surprises that he has had involved his grandfather, who
happens to have had the same
birthday that Ramlal has.
One year the family was celebrating this double birthday, and during the event Ramlal proudly
mentioned to his grandfather that not
.
only he had just turned as old as the last two digits of the year he was born in, but he was also a
prime number of years old. Also,
each of the two digits making up his age was also a prime.
Grandfather thought for a second, turned to him, and said that the same thing had just happened
to him!
What year did this occur, and how old had Ramlal and his grandfather just turned?
Answer
Ramlal is 23 years old (1923 born), his grandfather is 73 years old (1873 born) and all this
occurred in 1946.
It's clear that Ramlal had to have been born in the 1900s, and his grandfather in the 1800s.
If Ramlal was born in (1900 + X) and his grandfather in (1800 + Y), then
1900 + 2X = 1800 + 2Y (the year this happened)
Y = X + 50
Now, we need to find a pair of prime numbers, less then 100 and having difference of 50. There
are 6 such (X : Y) pairs: (3 :
53), (11 : 61), (17 : 67), (23 : 73), (29 : 79), (47 : 97)
But it is given that Ramlal's age is two digits i.e. X is greater than 9. Also, each of the two digits
making up their age are also a
prime. It follows the only possible pair is (23, 73).
Thus, Ramlal is 23 years old (1923 born), his grandfather is 73 years old (1873 born) and all this
occurred in 1946.
Think of words ending in -gry. Angry and Hungry are two of them. There are only three words in
the English language. What is the
third word? The word is something that everybody uses everyday. If you have listened carefully, I
have already told you what it is.
Answer
The third word is "language".
The first two sentences have absolutely nothing to do with the question: "Think of words ending in
-gry. Angry and Hungry are
two of them." Ignore those two sentences. They are there only to throw you off course. The real
question is "There are only
three words in the English language. What is the third word?" i.e. there are only three words in the
phrase "the English
language". The third word is "language", which is certainly something we use everyday. The first two
words are "the" and
"English".
However, one may still wonder if there are any other English words ending in -gry. There are.
aggry - a glass bead found buried in the earth in Ghana
meagry - of meager appearance
puggry - a light scarf wound around a hat or helmet to protect the head from the sun
A man is stranded on a desert island. All he has to drink is a 20oz bottle of sprite.
To conserve his drink he decides that on the first day he will drink one oz and the refill the bottle
back up with water. On the 2nd
day he will drink 2oz and refill the bottle. On the 3rd day he will drink 3oz and so on...
By the time all the sprite is gone, how much water has he drunk?
@ubmitted by : Alee
Answer
.
The man drunk 190oz of water.
It is given that the man has 20oz bottle of sprite. Also, he will drink 1oz on the first day and refill
the bottle with water, will drink
2oz on the second day and refill the bottle, will drink 3oz on the third day and refill the bottle, and
so on till 20th day. Thus at the
end of 20 days, he must have drunk (1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + ..... +18 + 19 + 20) = 210oz of liquid.
Out of that 210oz, 20oz is the sprite which he had initially. Hence, he must have drunk 190oz of
water.
Nicole and @haron, together have more than 10 but fewer than 30 bodyguards. One day, one of
the bodyguards, Cruz, decided to
leave Nicole and join @haron. Now both the females had the same number of bodyguards.
Eventually, Cruz rejoined Nicole. Also, Jim decided to leave @haron and join Nicole. Now, both
the females had a prime number of
bodyguards.
How many bodyguards did each have now?
Answer
Nicole have 11 bodyguards and @haron have 7 bodyguards.
If one bodyguard is moved from one group to other, it decreases one group by one and increases
other by one.
Before Cruz joined Sharon, Nicole had two more bodyguards than Sharon. (Since Cruz's switch
made the number of
bodyguards of both the females equal)
When Cruz switched back to Nicole, once again Nicole had two more bodyguards than Sharon.
Then, Jim moved from Sharon
to Nicole decreasing Sharon's bodyguards by one and increasing Nicole's bodyguards by one.
Hence, Nicole had four more
bodyguards than Sharon.
It is given that together had more than 10 but fewer than 30 bodyguards. Also, at the end they both
had prime number of
bodyguards. The only numbers fit the given conditions are 7 and 11.
Hence, now Nicole have 11 bodyguards and Sharon have 7 bodyguards.
On the road to Tirupati temple, four pilgrims met. Their names, in no particular order, were Ram,
Madhav, Mahesh, and Saccha.
Here is the conversation they had on the road:
Ram: "I usually only tithe two rupees, but if I beat Saccha to Tirupati temple, I'll gladly tithe
double!"
Mahesh: "If I get to Tirupati temple first, I shall show my gratitude by tithing six rupees! If I don't, I
shall tithe four rupees anyway."
Saccha: "You wayward fools are tossed by the wind! No matter what happens before here and
Tirupati temple, I shall tithe three
rupees only. Heaven forgive your false piety!"
Madhav: "Shut up, Saccha. I pledge three rupees if I beat you to Tirupati temple, but nothing if I
don't. We'll see who's right!"
Everybody was true to his word, and a total of thirteen rupees was tithed at Tirupati temple. In
what order did the pilgrims arrive?
Answer
They arrived at Tirupati temple in this order - Mahesh (6), Ram (4), Saccha (3), Madhav (0).
It is given that Saccha will tithe 3 rupees regardless. Hence among Mahesh, Ram and Madhav total
10 rupees was tithed.
Mahesh and Ram only promise to tithe even numbers of rupees. So if Madhav beat Saccha, his 3
rupees would make the total
.
odd. As the total, 10 rupees, is even, Madhav must not have beaten Saccha. He therefore tithed
nothing.
So between Mahesh and Ram, ten rupees was tithed. The only way to make ten rupees, from what
we know, is to assume that
Mahesh tithed 6 (by arriving in Tirupati temple first), and Ram tithed 4 (by beating Saccha to
Tirupati temple). Knowing this, we
can easily derive their order - Mahesh (6), Ram (4), Saccha (3), Madhav (0).
double!"
Answer
nothing.
On evey Sunday Amar, Akbar and Anthony lunch together at Preetam-Da-Dhaba where they
order lassi based on following facts.
1. Unless neither Amar nor Akbar have lassi, Anthony must have it.
2. If Amar does not have lassi, either Akbar or Anthony or both have it.
3. Anthony has lassi only if either Amar or Akbar or both have it.
4. Akbar and Anthony never have lassi together.
Who order(s) lassi?
Answer
Amar and Anthony both have lassi whereas Akbar never does.
Fact (2) can be alternatively stated that "either Amar or Akbar or Anthony must have lassi".
From Fact (3), it can be infered that either Amar or Akbar must have lassi.
Now, from Fact (1), it is apparent that Anthony too must have lassi. But according to Fact (4),
Akbar cannot have lassi when
Anthony does.
Thus Amar and Anthony both have lassi whereas Akbar never does.
.
If a man holds an Apple in his left hand, and an Orange in his right, What time does the 10:00
train come at?
@ubmitted by : @hona Craig
Answer
10:00 O'Clock
The train is scheduled for 10:00 and it will come at 10:00 clock unless it is late - no matter what the
guy holds in his hands.
Mr. Wagle goes to work by a bus. One day he falls asleep when the bus still has twice as far to go
as it has already gone.
Halfway through the trip he wakes up as the bus bounces over some bad potholes. When he
finally falls asleep again, the bus still
has half the distance to go that it has already travelled. Fortunately, Mr. Wagle wakes up at the end
of his trip.
What portion of the total trip did Mr. Wagle sleep?
Answer
Mr. wagle slept through half his trip.
Let's draw a timeline. Picture the bus route on a line showen below:
---------------- ________ -------- ________________
@tart 1/3 1/2 2/3 End
----- shows time for which Mr. Wagle was not sleeping
_____ shows time for which Mr. Wagle was sleeping
When Mr. Wagle fell asleep the first time, the bus sill had twice as far to go as it had already gone,
that marks the first third of
his trip.
He wake up halfway through the trip i.e slept from 1/3 mark to the 1/2 mark. He fell sleep again
when the bus still had half the
distance to go that it had already traveled i.e 2/3 mark.
Adding up, all sleeping times,
= (1/2 - 1/3) + (1 - 2/3)
= 1/6 + 1/3
= 1/2
Hence, Mr. wagle slept through half his trip.
You are locked inside a room with 6 doors - A, B, C, D, E, F. Out of which 3 are Entrances only
and 3 are Exits only.
One person came in through door F and two minutes later second person came in through door
A. He said, "You will be set free, if
you pass through all 6 doors, each door once only and in correct order. Also, door A must be
followed by door B or E, door B by C
or E, door C by D or F, door D by A or F, door E by B or D and door F by C or D."
After saying that they both left through door B and unlocked all doors. In which order must you
pass through the doors?
.
Answer
The correct order is CFDABE
It is given that one person came in through door F and second person came in through door A. It
means that door A and door F
are Entrances. Also, they both left through door B. Hence, door B is Exit.
As Exit and Entrance should alter each other and we know two Entrances, let's assume that the
third Entrance is W. Thus,
there are 6 possibilities with "_" indicating Exit.
(1) _W_A_F (2) _W_F_A (3) _F_W_A (4) _F_A_W (5) _A_W_F (6) _A_F_W
As door A must be followed by door B or E and none of them lead to the door F, (1) and (6) are
not possible.
Also, door D must be the Exit as only door D leads to the door A and door A is the Entrance.
(2) _W_FDA (3) _F_WDA (4) _FDA_W (5) DA_W_F
Only door D and door C lead to the door F. But door D is used. Hence, door C must be the Exit
and precede door F. Also, the
third Exit is B and the W must be door E.
(2) BECFDA (3) CFBEDA (4) CFDABE (5) DACEBF
But only door B leads to the door C and both are Exits. Hence, (2) and (5) are not possible. Also,
door F does not lead to door
B - discard (3). Hence, the possible order is (4) i.e. CFDABE.
Nicole and Sharon, together have more than 10 but fewer than 30 bodyguards. One day, one of
the bodyguards, Cruz, decided to
leave Nicole and join Sharon. Now both the females had the same number of bodyguards.
Eventually, Cruz rejoined Nicole. Also, Jim decided to leave Sharon and join Nicole. Now, both
the females had a prime number of
bodyguards.
How many bodyguards did each have now?
Answer
Nicole have 11 bodyguards and Sharon have 7 bodyguards.
If one bodyguard is moved from one group to other, it decreases one group by one and increases
other by one.
Before Cruz joined Sharon, Nicole had two more bodyguards than Sharon. (Since Cruz's switch
made the number of
bodyguards of both the females equal)
When Cruz switched back to Nicole, once again Nicole had two more bodyguards than Sharon.
Then, Jim moved from Sharon
to Nicole decreasing Sharon's bodyguards by one and increasing Nicole's bodyguards by one.
Hence, Nicole had four more
bodyguards than Sharon.
It is given that together had more than 10 but fewer than 30 bodyguards. Also, at the end they both
had prime number of
bodyguards. The only numbers fit the given conditions are 7 and 11.
Hence, now Nicole have 11 bodyguards and Sharon have 7 bodyguards.
double!"
.
Answer
nothing.
On evey Sunday Amar, Akbar and Anthony lunch together at Preetam-Da-Dhaba where they
order lassi based on following facts.
1. Unless neither Amar nor Akbar have lassi, Anthony must have it.
2. If Amar does not have lassi, either Akbar or Anthony or both have it.
3. Anthony has lassi only if either Amar or Akbar or both have it.
4. Akbar and Anthony never have lassi together.
Who order(s) lassi?
Answer
Amar and Anthony both have lassi whereas Akbar never does.
Fact (2) can be alternatively stated that "either Amar or Akbar or Anthony must have lassi".
From Fact (3), it can be infered that either Amar or Akbar must have lassi.
Now, from Fact (1), it is apparent that Anthony too must have lassi. But according to Fact (4),
Akbar cannot have lassi when
Anthony does.
Thus Amar and Anthony both have lassi whereas Akbar never does.
If a man holds an Apple in his left hand, and an Orange in his right, What time does the 10:00
train come at?
Submitted by : Shona Craig
Answer
10:00 O'Clock
The train is scheduled for 10:00 and it will come at 10:00 clock unless it is late - no matter what the
guy holds in his hands.
In a school, main-computer password changes after every hour based on set of words chosen for
each day. The following is the set
.
of passwords for a particular day.
9AM-1st Password: is not ready cloth Brain bath simple
10AM-2nd Password: ready not is cloth simple bath Brain
11AM-3rd Password: cloth is not ready Brain bath simple
12PM-4th Password: not is cloth ready simple bath Brain
1PM-5th Password: ready cloth is not Brain bath simple
Following the same rule, what will the 6th Password, if the 1st passoward is "Shy Shelly Says She
Shall Sew Sheets"?
Answer
The 6th Password will be "Shy She Says Shelly Sheets Sew Shall".
The pattern is - In the first step, the first three and the last three words are written in a reverse
order. Then, the first four and the
last three words are written in a reverse order. The process is repeated to obtain successive
passwords.
9AM - 1st Password: Shy Shelly Says She Shall Sew Sheets
10AM - 2nd Password: Says Shelly Shy She Sheets Sew Shall
11AM - 3rd Password: She Shy Shelly Says Shall Sew Sheets
12PM - 4th Password: Shelly Shy She Says Sheets Sew Shall
1PM - 5th Password: Says She Shy Shelly Shall Sew Sheets
2PM - 6th Password: Shy She Says Shelly Sheets Sew Shall
Assume that you have just heard of a scandal and you are the first one to know. You pass it on to
four person in a matter of 30
minutes. Each of these four in turn passes it to four other persons in the next 30 minutes and so
on.
How long it will take for everybody in the World to get to know the scandal?
Assume that nobody hears it more than once and the population of the World is approximately
5.6 billions.
Answer
Everybody in the World will get to know the scandal in 8 hours.
You came to know of a scandal and you passed it on to 4 persons in 30 minutes. So total (1+4) 5
persons would know about it
in 30 minutes.
By the end of one hour, 16 more persons would know about it. So total of (1+4+16) 21 persons
would know about it in one
hour.
Similarly, the other (1+4+16+64) persons would have know about it in one and a half hours.
(1+4+16+64+256) persons would
have know about it in two hours and so on...
It can be deduced that the terms of the above series are the power of 4 i.e. 4^0, 4^1, 4^2, 4^3 and
so on upto (2N+1) terms.
Also, the last term would be 4^2N where N is the number of hours.
Sum of the above mentioned series = [4^(2N+1)-1]/3
The sum of the series must be 5.6 billions. Hence, equating the sum of the series with 5.6 billions,
we get N=8 hours.
Scandals travel FAST !!!
.
You can construct a number from any date of the year by adding the number of the month to the
number of the day. For example:
May 15th would become the number 20, since May is the fifth month, and 5 + 15 = 20. November
14 would become 25, and so
on...
How many different numbers can you make, using dates of the Gregorian calendar?
Answer
There are 42 possible numbers, every number between 2 and 43 inclusive.
Following is the list of the numbers that can be constructed each month.
January : 2 to 32
February : 3 to 30 (ignoring leap year)
March : 4 to 34
April : 5 to 34
May : 6 to 36
June : 7 to 36
July : 8 to 38
August : 9 to 39
September : 10 to 39
October : 11 to 41
November : 12 to 41
December : 13 to 43
The most frequent numbers are those from 13 to 30 - they will occur once every month of every
year. The most infrequent
numbers are 2, 42, and 43. Each occurs only once a year - 2 on January 1st, 42 on December 30th,
and 43 on December 31st.
There is a cup with water and ice in it.
Will the water level change if the ice melts? Justify your answer.
Submitted by : Santa Clause
Answer
The water level will not change.
The ice displaces water equal to its mass and when ice melts, its mass remains the same.
However, if the ice is not floating in the water - either supercooled or not being allowed to float by
pressure or not enough water
to float - the level may change.
On a barnyard, there was a chicken, a turkey and a crow.
The chicken could fly at 5 mph but, as chickens are poor flyers, he gets tired very soon. After only
2 minutes of flying, he had to
walk at 1 mph for next three minutes before he could fly again.
The turkey could fly continuously at 4 mph, but he had a habit of swerving back and forth. So for
every 3 feet he flies, he actually
only travels 2 feet.
The crow could fly straight, at 2 mph.
Which animal would win a one mile race?
Answer
.
Chicken would win the one-mile race.
If you calculate the weighted average, you'll see that the chicken's average speed, after 5 minutes, is
2.6 mph. The turkey's
average speed is 2.67 mph. The crow, of course, has an average speed of 2 mph. From these
figures, you might guess that the
turkey would win. But NO !!!
The catch is the fact that the one-mile race does not take an even multiple of five minutes to
complete. The chicken's average
speed is only accurate after the full five minutes of flying/walking is completed. At any time before
that, the chicken's mean
speed will be higher.
After 20 minutes have passed, the chicken will have travelled 0.87 miles, and the turkey will have
travelled 0.89 miles.
However, the chicken will then begin flying at 5 mph, and will overtake the turkey.
The final results will be:
1. Chicken - 21.6 minutes (21 minutes 36 seconds)
2. Turkey - 22.5 minutes (22 minutes 30 seconds)
3. Crow - 30 minutes
Laloo, Baloo and Naloo were at the Health Club on the same day this month.
1. They all joined the health club last month.
2. One of them goes every 2 days, another one goes every 3 days and the third one goes every 7
days.
3. Laloo went to the health club for the first time this month on a Monday, Baloo went to the
health club for the first time this
month on a Wednesday and Naloo went to the health club for the first time this month on a
Friday.
4. Exactly one of them was at the health club on the first day of this month.
On which day of this month did Laloo, Baloo and Naloo meet?
Note that here "this month" means any one month in general.
Answer
They met on the 27th of this month.
Find out individual dates on which they were at the club.
From (2), 2-day man went to the health club for the first time this month on the 1st or 2nd. Also,
3-day man went to the health
club for the first time this month on the 1st, 2nd or 3rd. There are two possible cases:
Case I :
Laloo went on Monday, the 1st and every two days thereafter. Baloo went on Wednesday, the 3rd
and every three days
thereafter. Naloo went on Friday, the 5th and every seven days thereafter. Then,
Laloo's dates - 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31
Baloo's dates - 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30
Naloo's dates - 5, 12, 19, 26
Case II :
Baloo went on Wednesday, the 1st and every two days thereafter. Naloo went on Friday, the 3rd
and every three days
thereafter. Laloo went on Monday, the 6th and every seven days thereafter. Then,
Baloo's dates - 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31
Naloo's dates - 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30
Laloo's dates - 6, 13, 20, 27
It is given that they were at the club on the same day this month, then Case I is not possible. And
from Case II, they met on the
27th of this month.
No legs do I have to dance
.
No lungs do I have to breath
No life do I have to live or die
And yet I live.
What am I?
@ubmitted by : Jessica
Answer
Fire
Fire dances without legs.
Fire breaths without lungs.
Fire lives and dies without any life.
Every @unday, Jessica went to see her father in the city and came home on the 6:00 o'clock train.
One day she told her driver,
Jack, that she would be back an hour earlier and to pick her up at the station. Jack forgot and went
to get her at the usual time.
When Jessica arrived and did not find Jack there, she started walking home. Jack met her on the
road and took her back to the
home, where they arrived 20 minutes earlier than usual.
Can you figure out how long Jessica was walking before Jack picked her up? Note that Jack always
drove at the same speed.
Answer
Jessica must have been walking for 50 minutes.
Since they saved 20 minutes, they must have been 10 minutes from the station when Jack met
Jessica. At that point he saved
going the rest of the way to the station, which would have taken 10 minutes. (and 10 minutes for
coming back to the home,
hence total 20 minutes)
Since Jessica arrived an hour earlier at the station and Jack was at 10 minutes from the station, she
must have been walking
for 50 minutes.
Gomzi has 3 timepieces in his house - a wall clock, an alarm clock and a wristwatch. The
wristwatch is always accurate, whereas
the wall clock gains 2 minutes everyday and the alarm clock loses 2 minutes everyday.
At exactly midnight last night, all three watches were showing the same time.
If today is 25 July 2003, then on which date all three clocks will show the same time again?
Answer
All three clocks will show the same time again on midnight between 19 July 2004 and 20 July 2004.
A clock finishes on round in 12*60 i.e. 720 minutes.
If a clock gains 2 minutes everyday, then it would be 720 minutes ahead after 360 days. Thus, after
360 days, it will show the
same time again.
Similary, if a clock loses 2 minutes everyday, then it would be 720 minutes behind after 360 days.
Thus, after 360 days, it will
show the same time again.
Thus, after 360 days all three clocks will show the same time again i.e. midnight between 19 July
2004 and 20 July 2004.
.
AD
BGE
CF
Each of the letters above is represented by different single digit number (1 to 9). Also, A * B * C =
B*G*E=D*E*F
Which digit does G represent?
Answer
G represents 2.
Note that no letter can be 0, 5 or 7.
Then the product for each row is a multiple of 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 and 9. The smallest possible product
is 72. Thus the product is a
multiple of 72. But using 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 and 9 only once (and in a group of three), it is not possible
to get product larger than 72
three times. Hence, the product is 72.
A * B * C = B * G * E = D * E * F = 72
Note that each of A, C, D, F and G occurs only in one product whereas each of B and E occurs in
two products. Also, only G
can be determined with certainty, all other values are interchangeable.
Thus, the possible combinations are:
1 * 8 * 9 = 72
2 * 4 * 9 = 72
3 * 4 * 6 = 72
Because 4 and 9 are used twice, they should be B and E. Thus, one of the possible arrangement is
31
429
68
where 3 and 6 are interchangable. Also, 1 and 8 are interchangable.
Hence, G represents 2.
The three of us made some bets.
First, Waldo won from Molly as much as Waldo had originally. Next, Molly won from Spike as
much as Molly then had left. Finally,
Spike won from Waldo as much as Spike then had left. We ended up having equal amounts of
money.
I started with 50 cents. Who am I?
Answer
I am Molly.
Let Waldo start with W, Molly with M, and Spike with S. Following the above account we get the
following progression of
money:
W = 2*W, M = M-W
M = 2*(M-W), S = S-(M-W) = S+W-M
S = 2*(S+W-M), W = 2*W-(S+W-M) = W+M-S
And so Waldo finished with W+M-S, Molly with 2*(M-W), and Spike with 2*(S+W-M).
Since these must all be equal, we have three equations and three unknowns, so solve; this gives us
that 4*M = 5*S and 3*S =
.
4*W.
Now, if S = 1/2 this implies that W = 3/8 = 37.5 cents, an impossible amount of money to start
with.
If W = 1/2 this implies that S = 2/3, again an impossible amount to start with.
Finally, if M = 1/2 this implies that S = 2/5 = 40 cents, W = 3/10 = 30 cents, which works.
It follows that I am Molly.
The Beginning Of Eternity
The End Of Time And Space
The Beginning Of Every End,
And The End Of Every Place
What am I?
S mitted y Miria Han
Answer
Letter "E"
The Beginning Of Eternity
The End Of TimE And SpacE
The Beginning Of Every End,
And The End Of Every PlacE
Anna, her rother - Andre, her da ghter - Ami, and her son, Adam are tennis players. As a game
of do les
1. Anna's rother is directly across the net from Ami.
2. Adam is diagonally across the net from the worst player's siling.
3. The est player and the worst player are on the same side of the net.
Who is the est player?
.
Answer
The est player is Andre.
Find o t all possile arrangement s ch that no condition is contradicted.
From (1), there are two possile arrangements. Discarding two arrangements which are identical to
following two.
Andre Anna Andre Adam
------------------ AND ------------------
Ami Adam Ami Anna
(I) (II)
From (2), Anna is the worst player in Case I and Adam is the worst player in Case II.
From (3), Andre is the est player in oth the cases.
Hence, the est player is Andre.
I have fo r wings, t cannot fly
I never la gh and never cry
On the same spot I'm always fo nd,
toiling away with little so nd.
What am I?
S mitted y Cindy
Answer
A Windmill
It has four wings but can not fly. It never laughs or cries. It is always found on the same spot. And
it produces little sound
whenever little wind is there.
What is broken but right two times a day?
@ubmitted by : @hadow
Answer
A Watch - to be more specific An analog Watch
A brocken watch, whatever time it reads, will be accurate twice every 24 hours.
Ann, Bob, Cab and Ida are guards in a hospital.
1. Each of Ann, Bob and Cab stands guard exactly four days every week.
2. Exactly two persons stand guard together everyday.
3. No person stand guard three days in a row.
4. The partial listing is as shown:
.
5. @UN MON TUE WED THU FRI @AT
6.
Ann Cab Ida Ann Bob Cab Ida
Bob ? ? ? ? ? ?
Who does not stand guard with Ida?
Answer
Ann does not stand guard with Ida.
From (1) and (2), Ida stands guard on only two days i.e. Tuesdays and @aturdays. Thus, Ida is not
one of the unknown guards.
Consider Wednesday - either Bob or Cab stands guard with Ann.
Case I : On Wednesday Bob stands guard with Ann.
It implies that Ann stands guard with Cab on Friday. Then Cab stands guard with Bob on
Thursday and Bob stands guard with
Ida on @aturday. Then Ann stands guard with Cab on Monday and Cab stands guard with Ida on
Tuesday.
@UN MON TUE WED THU FRI @AT
Bob Ann Cab Bob Cab Ann Bob
Note that Bob and Cab stand guard with Ida where as Ann does not.
Case II : On Wednesday Cab stands guard with Ann.
It implies that Ann stands guard with Bob on Thursday. Then Bob stands guard with Cab on
Friday and with Ida on Tuesday.
Then Ann stands guard with Cab on Monday and Cab stands guard with Ida on @aturday.
@UN MON TUE WED THU FRI @AT
Bob Ann Bob Cab Ann Bob Cab
Note that Bob and Cab stand guard with Ida where as Ann does not.
Thus, Ann does not stand guard with Ida.
A group of fewer than 10 girls found a number of gold-coins which they were able to divide equally
among them.
After this division had been done, Lalita - one of the girls, suggested that it would be more
equitable to divide the gold-coins by
families rather than by individuals. Among the them, there were two groups with two sisters, of
course Lalita was not in either
group. The rest of the girls were unrelated to each other. A re-division by families would have
meant that the gold-coins per family
were 5 more than the gold-coins per girl.
The girls argued among themselves over this way of dividing the gold-coins. Before a final decision
is made, Ash - one of the girls,
decided that she did not want any gold-coins. Her share was equally divided (without
breaking/cutting any gold-coin) among the
other girls.
Finally, Lalita decided to withdraw her suggestion of dividing the gold-coins by families.
How many girls were there and how many gold-coins did each girl end up with?
Answer
There were total 6 girls. Each end up with 12 gold-coins.
The number of gold-coins is evenly divisible by the number of girls as well as the number of
families.
Let's assume that N is the number of gold-coins each girl received initially and G is the total
number of girls.
.
Then, total number of gold-coins = NG
If the gold-coins had been divided by families rather than by individuals, the number of recipients
would be (G - 2) and each
share would be (N + 5).
Again, total number of gold-coins = (N + 5)(G - 2)
But, the total number of the gold-coins is the same.
NG = (N + 5)(G - 2)
NG = NG -2N +5G -10
2N = 5G -10
N = (5/2)G - 5
Now, N and G are the positive integers and also total number of gold-coins must be divisible by G,
(G-1) and (G-2). This is
because initially there were G girls; then since it was divided family wise, the total number of units,
the coins were to be divided
would be (G-2) (as two groups had two sisters, so two girls got combined as one group, one per
group); and after Ash backed
out, there were (G-1) girls.
Now trying different EVEN values for G, starting with 2; there were total 6 girls and 60 gold-coins.
The gold-coins are divided
among 5 girls and hence each girl ends up with 12 gold-coins.
If a rook and a bishop of a standard chess set are randomly placed on a chessboard, what is the
probability that one is attacking
the other?
Note that both are different colored pieces.
@ubmitted by : Eamon
Answer
The probability of either the Rook or the Bishop attacking the other is 0.3611
A Rook and a Bishop on a standard chess-board can be arranged in 64P2 = 64*63 = 4032 ways
Now, there are 2 cases - Rook attacking Bishop and Bishop attacking Rook. Note that the Rook
and the Bishop never attack
each other simultaneously. Let's consider both the cases one by one.
Case I - Rook attacking Bishop
The Rook can be placed in any of the given 64 positions and it always attacks 14 positions. Hence,
total possible ways of the
Rook attacking the Bishop = 64*14 = 896 ways
Case II - Bishop attacking Rook
View the chess-board as a 4 co-centric hollow squares with the outermost square with side 8 units
and the innermost square
with side 2 units.
If the bishop is in one of the outer 28 squares, then it can attack 7 positions. If the bishop is in one
of the 20 squares at next
inner-level, then it can attack 9 positions. @imilarly if the bishop is in one of the 12 squares at next
inner-level, then it can attack
11 positions. And if the bishop is in one of the 4 squares at next inner-level (the innermost level),
then it can attack 13 positions.
Hence, total possible ways of the Bishop attacking the Rook
= 28*7 + 20*9 + 12*11 + 4*13
= 560 ways
Thus, the required probability is
= (896 + 560) / 4032
= 13/36
= 0.3611
Which animal is next in this sequence:
Gorilla, Hedgehog, Camel, Mouse, Fox, Bear, Mole, ?
.
Choose from:
Porcupine, Badger, Cow, Giraffe, Squirrel, Rhinoceros
Do explain your answer.
Sumied y : Elkie
Answer
The nex animal in he series is Badger.
The paern is - numer of characers in he animal name is equal o numer of characers in he
ordinally respecive calendar
monh name, saring wih January.
Firs animal (January-7) : Gorilla
Second animal (Feruary-8) : Hedgehog
Third animal (March-5) : Camel
Fourh animal (April-5) : Mouse
Fifh animal (May-3) : Fox
Sixh animal (June-4) : Bear
Sevenh animal (July-4) : Mole
Now, he nex animal mus e 6 characers long (for Augus). Thus, he nex animal in he series is
Badger.
If you follow he paern, hen he nex possile animals (from he given lis) will e Porcupine,
Giraffe, Squirrel, ec.
If an odd numer is red and an even numer is lue and you add hem ogeher wha colour does
i make?
Sumied y : Dino
Answer
Red
I is given ha an odd numer is Red and an even numer is Blue. Also, when you add an odd
numer o an even numer, he
resul is an odd numer. Thus, he resul makes he Red colour.
Noe ha Purple is no he answer as we are adding numers and no he colours.
Here in England McDonald's has jus launched a new adverising campaign. The poser shows 8
McDonald's producs and
underneah claims here are 40312 cominaions of he aove iems.
Given ha he maximum numer of iems allowed is 8, and you are allowed o have less han 8
iems, and ha he order of
purchase does no maer (i.e. uying a urger and fries is he same as uying fries and a urger)
How many possile cominaions are here? Are McDonald's correc in claiming here are 40312
cominaions?
@ m A Cr
ss
Answr
T
a p
ss c
mna
ns ar 12869.
I s gvn ha
can
rr mam m
f 8 ms an
ar a
w
hav ss han 8 ms.
As
, h
rr
f p rchas

s n
mar. L's cra a a f
r
rrng
a N ms sng X pr
cs.
Pr
cs Us (X) Ims
Orr
(N) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
.
11-------
211------
3121-----
41331----
514641---
6 1 5 10 10 5 1 - -
7 1 6 15 20 15 6 1 -
8 1 7 21 35 35 21 7 1
T
a (T) 8 28 56 70 56 28 8 1
Was
ch
s
X pr
cs fr
m
8 pr
cs (W)
8C1 8C2 8C3 8C4 8C5 8C6 8C7 8C8
T
a c
mna
ns
(T*W)
64 784 3136 4900 3136 784 64 1
Th s,
a p
ss c
mna
ns ar
= 64 + 784 + 3136 + 4900 + 3136 + 784 + 64 + 1
= 12869
Bran Tasr N
00706
Gvn h f

wng facs
1. Dnsh s
ngr han Far kh an
r han G rm.
2. Jan s
ngr han Chan an
r han Eshra.
3. Am s
ngr han Irfan an
r han Chan .
4. Far kh s
ngr han Bhavn an
r han Hman.
5. Irfan s
ngr han G rm an
r han Jan.
6. Hman s
r han G rm.
Wh
s h Y
ngs?
Answr
Eshra s h
ngs.
Dscar wh
vr ar
r han s
m
n.
From (1) Gurmit is younger than Dinesh and Farukh.
From (5) Jatin is younger than Irfan and Gurmit.
From (2) Eshrat is younger than Jatin and Chandu.
From above 3 deductions, Eshrat is younger than Dinesh, Farukh, Irfan, Gurmit, Jatin and
Chandu.
Also,
From (3) Chandu is younger than Amit and Irfan.
From (4) Hemant is younger than Farukh and Bhavin.
From (6) Gurmit is younger than Hemant.
From above 3 deductions, Gurmit is younger than Farukh, Bhavin and Hemant. Also, Chandu is
younger than Amit and Irfan.
But as seen earlier, Eshrat is younger than Gurmit and Chandu.
Hence, Eshrat is the youngest.
.
What do you first give away, then keep?
@ubmitted by : HappyGirl
Answer
Your Word/Promise
First you give "your word" then you have to keep "your word".
Using the numbers 0 to 9 once each, what combination will add up to exactly 100?
Note that you can use ONLY ADDITION.
@ubmitted by : Rich Martin
Answer
It is impossible to get 100 using digits 0-9 once each and only addition.
All digits from 0 to 9 add up to 45. Now, take any two digits (and make a two-digit number) and
add it to the remaining digits.
The result will always increase by a multiple of 9. e.g Let's take 1 and 2 i.e. 12 and add all
remaining digits to it, the total is 54
i.e. 45 + 9.
Thus, whatever you do the answer will always be 45 + 9X, where X is an integer. In other words,
we are trying to solve 45 + 9X
=100 for integer value of X.
Thus, it is impossible to get 100 using digits 0-9 once each and only addition
Always old, sometimes new,
Never sad, sometimes blue,
Never empty, sometimes full,
Never pushes, always pulls.
What is it?
@ m T rL
Answr
Th Moon
Th moon s o, nvr sa, nvr mp an nvr p shs. Thr ar Nw-moon, B -moon,
F -moon. Aso, p s war
cran s on h arh.
Bran Tasr No 00737
Consr a am of Towr of Hano (k h on ha o can pa on BranVsa).
If h owr has 2 scs, h as poss movs wh whch o can mov h nr owr o
anohr p s 3.
If h owr has 3 scs, h as poss movs wh whch o can mov h nr owr o
anohr p s 7.
Wha s h as poss movs wh whch o can mov h nr owr o anohr p f h
owr has N scs?
.
@ m Tm @anrs
Answr
Thr ar n mr of was o fn h answr.
To mov h ar s sc (a v N) from on owr o h ohr, rq rs 2(N-1) movs. Th s,
o mov N scs from on owr
o h ohr, h n mr of movs rq r s
= 2(N-1) + 2(N-2) + 2(N-3) + ..... + 22 + 21 + 20
= 2N - 1
For N scs, h n mr of movs s on mor han wo ms h n mr of movs for N-1 scs.
Th s, h rc rsv f ncon
s
F(1) = 1
F(N) = 2*[F(N-1)] + 1
whr N s h oa n mr of scs
Aso, on can arrv a h answr fnn h n mr of movs for smar n mr of scs an
hn rv h parn.
For 1 sc, n mr of movs = 1
For 2 scs, n mr of movs = 3
For scs, n mr of movs = 15
Th s, h parn s 2N - 1
Bran Tasr No 00738
Can o nam hr consc v as who sn h wors Mona, T sa, Wnsa,
Th rsa, Fra, @a ra, or
@ na?
@ m H N
rma
A swr
Ysra, T
a, T
m
rr
w
M
r c
m a
s ca ma s g Da-Bf
r-Ysra a Da-Afr-T
m
rr
w.
As
, "14 N
vmr, 15 N
vmr, 16 N
vmr" s h va a swr.
Bra Tasr N
00752
Tc-Tac-T
s g pa. O 'X' has pac

f h c
r rs. N
'O' has
pac .
Whr
s h par ha s pa g 'O' has
p hs frs 'O' s
ha 'X'
s ' w ?
Ass m ha
h pars ar vr g . Expa
r a swr.
@ m Uaghj
A swr
"O" sh
pac h c r.
L's mr h p
s
s as
1|2|3
---------
.
4|5|6
---------
7|8|9
I s gv ha "X" s pac

f h c
r r p
s
. L's ass m ha s a p
s
1.
N
w, 's ak ach p
s

.
If "O" s pac p
s
2, "X" ca awas w ch
s g p
s
4, 5
r 7.
If "O" s pac p
s
3, "X" ca awas w ch
s g p
s
4, 7
r 9.
If "O" s pac p
s
4, "X" ca awas w ch
s g p
s
2, 3
r 5.
If "O" s pac p
s
6, "X" ca awas w ch
s g p
s
3, 5
r 7.
If "O" s pac p
s
7, "X" ca awas w ch
s g p
s
2, 3
r 9.
If "O" s pac p
s
8, "X" ca awas w ch
s g p
s
3, 5
r 7.
If "O" s pac p
s
9, "X" ca awas w ch
s g p
s
3,
r 7.
If "O" s pac p
s
5 .. c r p
s
, "X" ca ' w ss "O"
s s
mh g f
sh ;))
H c, "O" sh
pac h c r.
Bra Tasr N
00754
Mark a haf
f a pzza
M
a. H a haf
f wha was f
T sa a s

. H
f

w hs par f
r
wk.
H
w m ch
f h pzza w
h hav a r g h wk?
@ m Ash Krapf
A swr
Mark w
hav a 127/128 (99.22%)
f h pzza r g h wk.
Mark a haf h pzza
M
a. O T sa, h w
hav a haf
f h rma g pzza
.. 1/4
f h
rg a pzza.
@mar, h w
hav a 1/8
f h
rg a pzza
W sa a s

f
r h sv as.
Total pizza Mark ate during the week is
= 1/2 + 1/4 + 1/8 + 1/16 + 1/32 + 1/64 + 1/128
= 127/128
= 99.22% of the original pizza
Three men, including Gianni and three woman, including Sachi are in line at the BrentWood post
office. Each has two different
pieces of business to conduct.
1. The first person is a woman.
2. Carlos wants to send an overnight package.
3. Lau is just ahead of Pimentelli who is the same sex as Lau.
4. Gianni is two places ahead of the person who wants to buy stamps.
5. Knutson - who is the opposite sex than Rendler - isn't the person who wanted to complain about
a mail carrier.
6. The six people, not necessarily in the same order are - Anthony, Donna, the person who wants
to fill out a change-ofaddress
form, the one who wants to buy a money order, the one who wants to send Airmail to Tibet and
the second
person in the line.
7. The four tasks of the last two people in line, not necessarily in the same order are - sending
books fourth class, buying a
money order, picking up a package and complaining about a mail carrier.
8. The person who wants to send books fourth class is just behind a person of the same sex.
9. Mary is just behind a person who wants to send an insured package.
10. The person who wants to send Airmail to Tibet is either two places ahead of or two places
behind the one who wants to
add postage to his or her meter.
11. Anthony isn't two places behind the who wants to pickup a registered letter.
12. Toriseza is two places ahead of the person who wants to pick up a package.
.
13. Knutson isn't just ahead of the person who wants to send an item parcel post.
Can you figure out where each customer is in the line, his or her full name (one surname is Loti)
and the two things he or she wants
to accomplish? Provide your answer is POSITION - FIRST NAME - LAST NAME - BUSINESS
format.
Answer
A very TOUGH puzzle !!!
POS FIRST NAME LAST NAME BUSINESS
1 Sachi Loti Fill Out a Change-of-Address Form
Add Postage to Meter
2 Gianni Lau Pick Up a Registered Letter
Send an Item Parcel Post
3 Carlos Pimentelli Overnight Package
Send Airmail to Tibet
4 Donna Toriseza Buy Stamps
Send an Insured Package
5 Mary Knutson Buy a Money Order
Send Books fourth Class
6 Anthony Rendler Complain About a Mail Carrier
Pick Up a Package
What has roots as nobody sees,
Is taller than trees,
Up, up it goes,
And yet never grows?
Submitted by : Sam
Answer
A Mountain
A mountian has roots that hold it up under the ground, which nobody sees.
It is taller than trees.
It goes up and up as it is so tall, but it never grows.
The population of an island consists of two and only two types of people : the knights, who
invariably tell the truth and the knaves
who always lie.
One day a stanger in the island, met four inhabitants. He asked the first one whether the second
was a Knight or a Knave. The
reply was "Knave". Similarly, the second inhabitant said that the third was a "Knave", and the third
said the same about the fourth.
Now he asked the fourth inhabitant that what would the first have said about the third. The reply
once again was "Knave".
Who is the fourth inhabitant, Knight or Knave?
.
Answer
The fourth inhabitant is a Knave.
Take two cases.
Assume that the first inhabitant was a Knight. It means that second inhabitant was a Knave as the
first was telling the truth.
Similarly, the third inhabitant was a Knight as the second was lying. Inturn, the forth inhabitant was
a Knave as the third was
telling the truth.
Now the first and the third both are Knight. So the first would have said "Knight" for the third
person. But the forth would have
said "Knave" and he did. Hence, the fourth person was Knave.
Tryout second case yourself i.e. assume that the first inhabitant was a Knave.
What's filled in the morning and emptied at night, and one day of the year its emptied in the
morning and emptied at night?
Submitted by : Robert Coster
Answer
A stocking or a sock
Usually, it is filled with your foot in the morning and taken off (i.e. emptied) at night. But on
Christmas, it is emptied at night so
that Santa can fill it with gifts; and emptied in the morning by children.
An old tea merchant in New York's Chinatown was trying to figure out how to divide 20 pounds of
tea into 2-pound packets using a
simple balance scale. But this merchant could only find two weights around the shop - one was 5
pounds and the other was 9
pounds.
Can you figure out how he did it?
Submitted by : Johnny B. Good
Answer
There are many ways to do it.
Method I
1. Get 4 pounds of tea using 9-pound and 5-pound weights.
2. Using the balance, divide this 4 pounds of tea into 2 equal parts of 2 pounds each.
3. Using this 2-pound tea packet as a make-shift weight, divide the remaining tea into 9 packets of
2-pounds each.
Method II
1. Using 9-pounds weight, get 9 pounds of tea.
2. Using 9-pounds weight again, get another 9 pounds of tea from remaining 11 pounds.
3. Now we have 2 pounds of tea. Make a packet of it.
4. Using this 2-pound tea packet as a make-shift weight, divide the remaining tea into 9 packets of
2-pounds each.
.
How many possible combinations are there in a 3x3x3 rubics cube?
In other words, if you wanted to solve the rubics cube by trying different combinations, how many
might it take you (worst case
senerio)?
How many for a 4x4x4 cube?
@ m @arah F

Answr
Thr ar 4.3252 * 10^19 p
ss c
mna
ns f
r 3x3x3 R cs an 7.4012 * 10^45 p
ss
c
mna
ns f
r 4x4x4
R cs.
L's c
nsr 3x3x3 R cs frs.
Thr ar 8 c
rnr c s, whch can arrang n 8! was.
Each
f s 8 c s can rn n 3 ffrn rc
ns, s
r ar 3^8
rna
ns
a
gr. B f
g a
n
f c
rnr c n
c
sn p
s
ns an
rna
ns,
n
n
f 3
rna
ns
f fna
c
rnr c s p
ss. T s,

a was c
rnr c s can pac = (8!) * (3^8)/8 = (8!) * (3^7)
@mar, 12 g c s can arrang n 12! was.
Eac
f s 12 c s can rn n 2 ffrn rc
ns, s
r ar 2^12
rna
ns
a
gr. B f
g a
n
f g c n
c
sn p
s
ns an
rna
ns,
n
n
f 2
rna
ns
f fna
g c s p
ss. T s,

a was g c s can pac = (12!) * (2^12)/2 = (12!) * (2^11)
Hr, w av ssna p c s apar an s ck c s ack n pac wrvr w pas.
In ra, w can
n
m
v c s ar
n rnng facs
f c s. I rns
a
can' rn facs n
s c a wa as
swc
p
s
ns
f w
c s w r rnng a
rs
r
rgna p
s
ns. T s f
g a
w
c s n pac, r s
n
n aana c
c f
r m (n
2!). Hnc, w m s v 2.
T
a ffrn p
ss c
mna
ns ar
= [(8!) * (3^7)] * [(12!) * (2^11)] / 2
= (8!) * (3^7) * (12!) * (2^10)
= 4.3252 * 10^19
@mar, f
r 4x4x4 R cs
a ffrn p
ss c
mna
ns ar
= [(8!) * (3^7)] * [(24!)] * [(24!) / (4!^6)] / 24
= 7.4011968 * 10^45
N
a r ar 24 g c s, wc
can n
rn n 2
rna
ns (nc n
2^24 / 2).
As
, r ar 4 cnr c s
pr fac .. (24!) / (4!^6). Y
can swc 2 c s w
affcng rs
f c
mna
n as
4*4*4 as vn mns
ns
(nc n
vs
n 2). B parn
n
n s s r
a n 4 rc
ns
vr 6 facs, nc
v 24.
Bran Tasr N
00820
Am, Bavn, Hmans an Raks ar sng ar
n a a.
T Ec
ncs Engnr s sng
f
f Mcanca Engnr.
Amit is sitting opposite to Computer Engineer.
Himanshu likes to play Computer Games.
Bhavin is sitting to the right of the Chemical Engineer.
Can you figure out everyone's profession?
.
Answer
Amit is the Mechanical Engineer. Bhavin is the Computer Engineer. Himanshu and Rakesh are
either Chemical Engineer or
Elecronics Engineer.
Amit and Bhavin are sitting opposite to each other. Whereas Chemical Engineer and Elecronics
Engineer are sitting opposite to
each other.
We cannot find out who is Chemical Engineer and Elecronics Engineer as data provided is not
sufficient.
Pooja and Esha met each other after long time. In the course of their conversation, Pooja asked
Esha her age. Esha replied, "If you
reverse my age, you will get my husbund's age. He is of course older than me. Also, the difference
between our age is 1/11th of the
sum of our age."
Can you help out Pooja in finding Esha's age?
Answer
Esha's age is 45 years.
Assume that Esha's age is 10X+Y years. Hence, her hunsbands age is (10Y + X) years.
It is given that difference between their age is 1/11th of the sum of their age. Hence,
[(10Y + X) - (10X + Y)] = (1/11)[(10Y + X) + (10X + Y)]
(9Y - 9X) = (1/11)(11X + 11Y)
9Y - 9X = X + Y
8Y = 10X
4Y = 5X
Hence, the possible values are X=4, Y=5 and Esha's age is 45 years.
You·ve been placed on a course of expensive medication in which you are to take one tablet of
medicine A and one tablet of
medicine B daily. You must be careful that you take just one of each because taking more of either
can have serious side effects.
Taking an A without taking a B, or vice versa, can also be very serious, because they must be taken
together in order to be
effective. In summary, you must take exactly one of the A pills and one of the B pills at one time.
You open up the A bottle, and you tap one A pill into your hand. You put that bottle aside and
you open the B bottle. You do the
same, but by mistake, two Bs fall into your hand with the A pill.
Now, you weren't watching your hand as the pills fell into it; so you can't tell the A pill apart from
the two B pills. The pills look
identical and they are not marked differently in any way.
You cannot tell which pill is which, and they are very costly, so you cannot afford to throw them
away and start over again.
How do you get your daily dose of exactly one A and exactly one B without wasting any of the
pills?
Answer
Cut each of the 3 pills in half and carefully separate then into 2 piles, with half of each pill in each
pile. You do not know which
pill is which, but you are 100% sure that each of the two piles now contains two halves of pill B and
half of pill A. Now take out a
pill A, cut it in half, and add one half to each stack.
Now you have two stacks, each one containing two halves of pill A, and two halves of pill B. Take
one stack of pills today, and
save the second stack for tomorrow.
.
You·ve been placed on a course of expensive medication in which you are to take one tablet of
medicine A and one tablet of
medicine B daily. You must be careful that you take just one of each because taking more of either
can have serious side effects.
Taking an A without taking a B, or vice versa, can also be very serious, because they must be taken
together in order to be
effective. In summary, you must take exactly one of the A pills and one of the B pills at one time.
You open up the A bottle, and you tap one A pill into your hand. You put that bottle aside and
you open the B bottle. You do the
same, but by mistake, two Bs fall into your hand with the A pill.
Now, you weren't watching your hand as the pills fell into it; so you can't tell the A pill apart from
the two B pills. The pills look
identical and they are not marked differently in any way.
You cannot tell which pill is which, and they are very costly, so you cannot afford to throw them
away and start over again.
How do you get your daily dose of exactly one A and exactly one B without wasting any of the
pills?
Answer
Cut each of the 3 pills in half and carefully separate then into 2 piles, with half of each pill in each
pile. You do not know which
pill is which, but you are 100% sure that each of the two piles now contains two halves of pill B and
half of pill A. Now take out a
pill A, cut it in half, and add one half to each stack.
Now you have two stacks, each one containing two halves of pill A, and two halves of pill B. Take
one stack of pills today, and
save the second stack for tomorrow.
Santa and Banta are in charge of counting the people who get on and off the elevator in a hotel.
They take turns riding to the top
floor and back down, counting as they go. After two such trips each morning, two around noon
and two in the evening, there is an
average taken.
The hotel manager wants to know today's average.
1. On Banta's noon trip there were 32 fewer people than in his morning count.
2. Santa counted a total of 122 in the morning and noon counts, just one higher than his evening
count, but 24 more than
Banta's evening count.
3. Santa's morning count is the same as Banta's average.
4. Santa's evening count was 37 more than Banta's morning count.
Answer
From (2), Santa's evening count was 121 and Newell's evening count was 98.
From (4), Santa's evening count was 37 more than Newell's morning count. Hence, Newell's
morning count was 84.
From (1), Banta's noon count was 32 less than his morning count. Hence, Banta's noon count was
52.
Thus, Banta's total count = (84 + 52 + 98) = 234
Average = 234 / 3 = 78
From (3), Santa's morning count was same as Banta's average. Hence, Santa's morning count was
78.
From (2), Santa's total count for morning and noon was 122. Hence, Santa's noon count was 44
(122 - 78).
Thus, Santa's total count = (78 + 44 + 121) = 243
Average = 243 / 3 = 81
Morning Noon Evening Total Average
.
Santa 78 44 121 243 81
Banta 84 52 98 234 78
Consider the following banking transactions. Deposit $50.00 and withdraw it as follows:
withdraw $20.00 leaving $30.00
withdraw $15.00 leaving $15.00
withdraw $ 9.00 leaving $ 6.00
withdraw $ 6.00 leaving $ 0.00
------ -----
$50.00 $51.00
Where did $1.00 come from?
@ mied @ sie
Answer
The calc laion done is wrong. The s m of "leaving" amo ns afer ever wihdrawal is no he oal
amo n wihdrawn. The
oal amo n wihdrawn is he s m of all wihdraws, no s m of all alance amo ns.
I have wo ees can' see,
Two fee can' walk,
A eak can' ea,
Two wings, can' fl.
Wha am I?
@ mied G@N
Answer
A o ird or a dead ird
A ird have wo ees, wo fee, a eak and wo wings. B onl a o ird or a dead ird can' se
hem.
When Rah l finall finished ping his Thesis on ´Crsal Repor Designµ, he was s rprised o
noice ha he n mer of digis he
sed o n mer is pages was exacl a m liple of he n mer of pages in he Thesis.
How man pages does he Thesis conain?
Noe ha his work conains over 1000 pages, fewer han 10000 pages.
.
Answer
Rah l's Thesis conains 1107 pages.
The firs 999 pages of Rah l's Thesis ses
9(1) + 90(2) + 900(3) = 2889 digis
Therefore, (999 + N) pages in Rah l's Thesis will se (2890 + 4N) digis, where 1000 < N < 10000.
Now, i is given ha he n mer of digis sed o n mer pages were exacl a m liple of he
n mer of pages in he Thesis.
Th s,
(2889 + 4N) = K * (999 + N) where K is some posiive ineger.
2889 + 4N = 999K + KN
2889 - 999K = KN - 4N
2889 - 999K = N * (K - 4)
N = (2889 - 999K) / (K - 4)
The aove eq aion is correc onl for K = 3, which means ha N = 108
Hence, Rah l's Thesis conains (999 + 108) 1107 pages.
Sam and Appu are intelligent mathematicians. Both of them have two prime numbers written on
their foreheads and are told that
any three of them form the sides of a triangle with prime perimeter. They take turns stating
whether they can deduce the numbers
on their own foreheads.
Sam sees 13 and 17 on Appu's forehead and each of them has stated "Don't know" on each of their
first two turns.
It is now Sam's third turn. What are the numbers on Sam's forehead?
Answer
The numbers on Sam's forhead are 13 and 17.
Corresponding to 13 and 17 on Appu's head, there are just 3 combinations which satisfy prime
perimeter triangle condition: (7,
17), (11, 13) and (13, 17)
If Sam had 7 and 17, Appu would have guessed 13 and 17 in his first guess as that is the only
possible solution.
If Sam had 11 and 13, Appu had one of the 2 choices to make (5, 13) and (13, 17). But Appu
being an intelligent mathematician
would never had chosen (5, 13) because if that was the case, his counterpart would have guessed
(11, 13) in his first guess.
But since Sam passed on his first attempt, Appu knows it cannot be (5, 13). Incidentally Appu is
not able to guess it in the
second turn also so even (11, 13) as an option is ruled out.
The last option is (13, 17) which like before has 3 possibilities. Since both pass first two times only
that option remains and Sam
guesses it right in his third attempt.
Hence, the numbers on Sam's forhead are (13, 17).
The secret agent X emailed some code to his head office. They are "RADAR, LEVEL, ROTOR,
REDIVIDER, MOTOR". But four of
these five words have something in common and one is fake.
Can you tell which one is fake? Ignore the fact that four of the code-words are of the same length.
.
Answer
The fake code-word is MOTOR.
All the code-words except MOTOR are Palindromes.
Scientist decided to do a study on the population growth of rabbits. Inside a controlled
environment, 1000 rabbits were placed.
Six months later, there were 1000Z rabbits. At the beginning of the 3rd year, there were roughly
2828Z rabbits, which was 4 times
what the scientists placed in there at the beginning of the 1st year.
If Z is a positive variable, how many rabbits would be there at the beginning of the 11th year?
@ubmitted by David Johnson
Answer
At the beginning of the 11th year, there would be 1,024,000 rabbits.
At the beginning, there were 1000 rabbits. Also, there were 4000 rabbits at the beginning of third
year which is equal to 2828Z.
Thus, Z = 4000/2828 i.e. 1.414 (the square root of 2)
Note that 2828Z can be represented as 2000*Z*Z (Z=1.414), which can be further simplified as
1000*Z*Z*Z*Z
Also, it is given that at the end of 6 months, there were 1000Z rabbits.
It is clear that the population growth is 1.414 times every six months i.e. 2 times every year. After
N years, the population would
be 1000*(Z^(2N)) i.e. 1000*(2^N)
Thus, at the beginning of the 11th year (i.e. after 10 years), there would be 1000*(2^10) i.e.
1,024,000 rabbits.
In the General meeting of "Friends Club", @ameer said, "The repairs to the Club will come to a
total of Rs 3120 and I propose that
this amount should be met by the members, each paying an equal amount."
The proposal was immediately agreed. However, four members of the Club chose to resign,
leaving the remaining members to pay
an extra Rs 26 each.
How many members did the Club originally have?
Answer
The Club originally had 24 members.
Assume that there were initially N members.
As 4 members resigned and remaining members paid Rs 26 each, it means that total amount of 4
members is equal to Rs 26
each from remaining (N-4) members. Thus,
4 * (3120 / N) = 26 * (N - 4)
12480 = 26N2 - 104N
26N2 - 104N - 12480 = 0
@olving the quadratic equation we get N=24.
Hence, the Club originally had 24 members.
.
A teacher writes an integer less than 50,000 on the blackboard.
One student states that the number is a multiple of 2; a second student states that the number is a
multiple of 3; and so on until the
twelfth student states that it is a multiple of 13.
The teacher remarks that all except two of the students were right and, moreover, that the two were
wrong spoke one after the
other.
What was the number that the teacher wrote on the blackboard?
Answer
The teacher wrote 25,740 on the blackboard.
Let N be the number that teacher wrote on the blackboard.
Since all the students, except two who spoke one after other, were correct; it can be deduced that
N must be divisible by 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12 and 13. This is because if N is not divisible by 2, then it is not divisible by 4
also. If N is not divisible by 3,
then it is not divisible by 6 also. If N is not divisible by 5, then it is not divisible by 10 also. And so
on. All these leaves 7, 8 and 9
as the only possible numbers which do not divide N. Hence, there are 2 cases.
Case I: N is not divisible by 8 and 9
In this case, the smallest number divisible by all other numbers (i.e. Least Common Multiple) is
60,060. But the number is
greater than the one written on the blackboard.
Case I: N is not divisible by 7 and 8
In this case, the smallest number divisible by all other numbers (i.e. Least Common Multiple) is
25,740.
Thus, the teacher wrote 25,740 on the blackboard.
Using five zeroes can you make a total of 120?
Note that you can use any mathematical operations.
Answer
(0! + 0! + 0! + 0! + 0!)!
= (1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1)!
= 5!
= 120
Other valid answers are:
(e0 + e0 + e0 + e0 + e0)!
= (1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1)!
= 5!
= 120
((0! + 0!)(0! + 0!) + 0!)!
= ((1 + 1)(1 + 1) + 1)!
= (22 + 1)!
= (4 + 1)!
= 5!
= 120
(cos0 + cos0 + cos0 + cos0 + cos0)!
= (1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1)!
= 5!
= 120
.
What is it that casts a shadow at midnight but not at noon,
What moves when all is still but not a moment too soon,
What at twilight is three feet tall,
But what at midnight is largest of all?
Can you solve this riddle?
@ubmitted by : Mike Chaney
Answer
The Moon
Teaser No : 00854
In the middle of the confounded desert, there is the lost city of "Ash". To reach it, I will have to
travel overland by foot from the
coast. On a trek like this, each person can only carry enough rations for five days and the farthest
we can travel in one day is 30
miles. Also, the city is 120 miles from the starting point.
What I am trying to figure out is the fewest number of persons, including myself, that I will need in
our Group so that I can reach the
city, stay overnight, and then return to the coast without running out of supplies.
How many persons (including myself) will I need to accomplish this mission?
Answer
Total 4 persons (including you) required.
It is given that each person can only carry enough rations for five days. And there are 4 persons.
Hence, total of 20 days rations
is available.
1. First Day : 4 days of rations are used up. One person goes back using one day of rations for the
return trip. The
rations remaining for the further trek is for 15 days.
2. @econd Day : The remaining three people use up 3 days of rations. One person goes back using
2 days of rations for
the return trip. The rations remaining for the further trek is for 10 days.
3. Third Day : The remaining two people use up 2 days of rations. One person goes back using 3
days of rations for the
return trip. The rations remaining for the further trek is for 5 days.
4. Fourth Day : The remaining person uses up one day of rations. He stays overnight. The next
day he returns to the
coast using 4 days of rations.
Thus, total 4 persons, including you are required.
In the middle of the confounded desert, there is the lost city of "Ash". To reach it, I will have to
travel overland by foot from the
coast. On a trek like this, each person can only carry enough rations for five days and the farthest
we can travel in one day is 30
miles. Also, the city is 120 miles from the starting point.
What I am trying to figure out is the fewest number of persons, including myself, that I will need in
our Group so that I can reach the
city, stay overnight, and then return to the coast without running out of supplies.
How many persons (including myself) will I need to accomplish this mission?
Answer
.
Total 4 persons (including you) required.
It is given that each person can only carry enough rations for five days. And there are 4 persons.
Hence, total of 20 days rations
is available.
1. First Day : 4 days of rations are used up. One person goes back using one day of rations for the
return trip. The
rations remaining for the further trek is for 15 days.
2. Second Day : The remaining three people use up 3 days of rations. One person goes back using
2 days of rations for
the return trip. The rations remaining for the further trek is for 10 days.
3. Third Day : The remaining two people use up 2 days of rations. One person goes back using 3
days of rations for the
return trip. The rations remaining for the further trek is for 5 days.
4. Fourth Day : The remaining person uses up one day of rations. He stays overnight. The next
day he returns to the
coast using 4 days of rations.
Thus, total 4 persons, including you are required.
Angela had a craving for mixed nuts, but all she had in the cupboard was a bag of peanuts and a
bag of almonds (Guess she
needs to do some shopping). Being the smart young lady that she is, she poured all the almonds
into an empty jar and then poured
all of the peanuts on top, which did not quite fill the jar.
Angela thought to herself, "I want mixed nuts." She put the lid on and begin vigorously shaking the
jar up and down in order to get
mixed nuts while watching education television.
After a few minutes of continuous shaking she suddenly realized that the peanuts and almonds
were not mixed at all. In fact, the
almonds were on top! Angela was amazed to see that the almonds rose to the top, even though she
knew that the almonds were
bigger and heavier than the peanuts.
She got to thinking that this is the same thing that happens in boxes of cereal and bags of potato
chips. Why, she wonders, does
the heavier objects shake to the top?
Can anyone out there help Angela figure this out.
Submitted by Russ Schenck
Answer
The large objects (bigger and heavier) rose to the top of the jar because the smaller objects slide
through the small gaps
between the large objects to the bottom. Also, the smaller objects fit closer together so that they do
not allow the larger objects
to slide through.
An anthropologist discovers an isolated tribe whose written alphabet contains only six letters (call
the letters A, B, C, D, E and F).
The tribe has a taboo against using the same letter twice in the same word. It's never done.
If each different sequence of letters constitues a different word in the language, what is the
maximum number of six-letter words
that the language can employ?
Submitted by Shelley
Answer
The language can employ maximum of 720 six-letter words.
It is a simple permutation problem of arranging 6 letters to get different six-letter words. And it can
be done in in 6! ways i.e. 720
ways.
.
In otherwords, the first letter can be any of the given 6 letters (A through F). Then, whatever the
first letter is, the second letter
will always be from the remaining 5 letters (as same letter can not be used twice), and the third
letter always be from the
remaining 4 letters, and so on. Thus, the different possible six-letter words are 6*5*4*3*2*1 = 720
Find the least number which when divided by 35, leaves remainder 25; when divided by 45, leaves
remainder 35 and when divided
by 55, leaves remainder 45.
Answer
3455
The answer is LCM of (35, 45, 55) minus 10.
LCM of (35, 45, 55) is 3465.
Hence, the answer is 3455.

Brain Teasers

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Brain Teasers

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Brain Teasers

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Brain Teaser No : 00001

Brain Teaser No : 00002

Brain Teaser No : 00003

Brain Teaser No : 00005

Brain Teaser No : 00007

Brain Teaser No : 00008

Brain Teaser No : 00010

Brain Teaser No : 00011

Brain Teaser No : 00014

Brain Teaser No : 00015

Brain Teaser No : 00016

Brain Teaser No : 00017

You might also like

Pfad - The Proxy pFad of © 2024 Garber Painting. All rights reserved.